FA150 Service Manual D1 1-15

U-AIS Transponder
FA-150
Important;
This manual is intended for use by authorized
FURUNO service technicians for the installation
of this equipment.
Under no circumstances should the contents of
this manual be released to the user.
The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2006

D1 : JAN . 15, 2009
Pub. No. SME-44310-D1
(NAYO ) FA-150 *00015767500*
*00015767500*
* 0 0 0 1 5 7 6 7 5 0 0 *
2/2
Connection to NavNet vx2 and 3D
To connect FA-150 to NavNet vx2 and 3D via LAN, software update and change of DIP
switch setting are required. The AIS requires NET-100 board, 03P9332.
Software: V01.09 (FA-1501) and V01.07 (FA-1502) or above

DIP Switch, #4 of S3 on MAIN board: OFF
S3 Position Remarks
#1 to #3 OFF Not used
#4 OFF ON For PC connection
ON For NavNet vx2
OFF and 3D connection
Fig.1 S2 on MAIN board, 24P0035
S3
SET LAN PORT menu

Figs.2 and 3 show SET LAN PORT menu for NavNet connection with #4 of S3 set to
OFF position. Items in bold are setup on each FA-150 and other items remain
unchanged.
[SET LAN PORT] 2/2

[SET LAN PORT] 1/2
GATEWAY ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
000.000.000.000
172.031.024.001
HOST NAME: AIS0
SUB NET MASK
AIS0OUTPUT: CONTINUOUS
255.255.000.000
GPSOUTPUT: AUTO
PORT No.: 10000
ZDAOUTPUT: AUTO
Fig.2 SET LAN PORT (1/2) Fig.3 SET LAN PORT (2/2)
for NavNet connection for NavNet connection
Fig.4 shows the original menu for PC connection.
[SET LAN PORT]

MODE: DISABLE
IP ADDRESS
172.031.024.001
SUB NET MASK
255.255.000.000
PORT No.: 10000
QUIT [MENU] Fig. 4 SET LAN PORT menu
for PC connection
MSC1/Circ.1252
AIS Test Report
Model: FA-150 FA-100

Serial Number:
Name of ship:
The AIS has been tested according to IMO SN/Circ.227

and resolution MSC.74(69), annex 3
Contents
AUTO MATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS) TEST REPORT
Attachments
1. AIS Initial Setting List
2. Measurements
3. Interconnection Diagram
4. Antenna Lay out
MSC1/Circ.1252
AUTO MATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS) TEST REPORT
Name of ship/call sign:

MMSI number:
Port of registry:
IMO Number:
Gross tonnage:
Date keel laid:
1. Installation details
Item Status
1.1 AIS transponder type:
1.2 Type approval certificate
1.3 Initial installation configuration report on board?
1.4 Drawings provided? (Antenna-, AIS-arrangement and block diagram)
1.5 Main source of electrical power,
1.6 Emergency source of electrical power,
1.7 Capacity to be verified if the AIS is connected to a battery
1.8 Pilot plug near pilots operating position?
1.9 120 V AC provided near pilot plug? (Panama and St. Lawrence requirement)
2. AIS programming . Static information

2.1 MMSI number
2.2 IMO number
2.3 Radio call sign
2.4 Name of ship
2.5 Type of ship
2.6 Ship length and beam
2.7 Location of GPS antenna
3. AIS programming . Dynamic information

3.1 Ships position with accuracy and integrity status (Source: GNSS)
3.2 Time in UTC (Source: GNSS)
3.3 Course over ground (COG) (will fluctuate at dockside) (Source GNSS)
3.4 Speed over ground (SOG) (zero at dockside) (Source: GNSS)
3.5 Heading (Source: Gyro)
3.6 Navigational status
3.7 Rate of turn, where available (ROT)
3.8 Angle of heel, pitch and roll, where available
4. AIS programming . voyage related information

4.1 Ships draught
4.2 Type of cargo
4.3 Destination and ETA (at masters discretion)
4.4 Route plan (optional)
4.5 Short safety-related messages
MSC1/Circ.1252
5. Performance test using measuring instrument

5.1 Frequency measurements AIS ch. 1 and 2, GMDSS ch. 70
5.2 Transmitting output, AIS ch. 1 and 2, GMDSS ch. 70
5.3 Polling information ch. 70
5.4 Read data from AIS
5.5 Send data to AIS
5.6 Check AIS response to virtual vessels.
6. On air. performance test

6.1 Check reception performance
6.2 Confirm reception of own signal from other ship/VTS
6.3 Polling by VTS/shore installation
Electromagnetic interference from AIS observed to other installations?:
Remarks:
The AIS has been tested according to IMO SN/Circ.227 and resolution MSC.74(69),
annex 3
Name of Radio Inspector Date and place Name of Radio Inspector
Company
MSC1/Circ.1252
This Test Report is in accordance with MSC.1/Circ. 1252
1. AIS Initial Setting List (FA-100)
Setting Item Setting

MMSI
IMO
NAME
C.SIGN
1.SET SHIP DATA
DRAUGHT
DTE DEFAULT / KEY & DISP
DATE
2.SET DESTINATION TIME
DESTINATION
5.INIT 3.SET NAV STATUS NAV STATUS
SETTINGS CREW
4.SET TYPE&CREW TYPE CLASS A / B
TYPE NO.
CPA
5.SET CPA/TCPA TCPA
ACTV ENBL / DSBL
1. INTERNAL ANT POS A: B: C: D:
6.SET ANNTENA POS
2. EXTERNAL ANT POS A: B: C: D:
MSC1/Circ.1252

PC I/O 4800bps / 38.4kbps
SNSR1 4800bps / 38.4kbps
2.I/O
LR 4800bps / 38.4kbps
FUNCTION
BEACON 4800bps / 38.4kbps
EXTRA1 4800bps / 38.4kbps
XTRA I/O 4800bps / 38.4kbps
PORT LR LR / EXTDISP
1. SET
1.L/L COG SOG SN1: SN2: SN3: EX1: LR: PC: LAN:
I/O
2.HDG SN1: SN2: SN3: EX1: LR: PC: LAN:
PORT
3.ROT SN1: SN2: SN3: EX1: LR: PC: LAN:
3.I/O RESPONSE PC/LAN /NONE / EX1 / LR
PRIORITY EX1 DSBL / ENBL
4. AIS LR DSBL / ENBL
PC DSBL / ENBL
LAN DSBL / ENBL
4.SET IP ADR 000-000-000-000 ->
LAN SUB NET MASK 000-000-000-000 ->
6.
(IP ADDR) PORT NO 1000 ->
SYSTEM
SETTING 1.VIEW POWER W
CHANNL CHANNEL NO. CH-A: CH-B:
TIME
FROM
2.SET POWER
CHANNEL 2.CHANNE CH NO.
L EDIT MODE
ZONE
CH AREA
3.SET LR
LR MODE AUTO / MANUAL
MODE
4.SET AD-10 DSBL / ENBL
OTHER
ROT sec
I/O
ALARM ON / OFF
5.SET
CPA/TCPA ON / OFF
BUZZER
MSG ALM ON / OFF
Program Number Version

MAIN 245 - 0001 - -
SUB 245 - 0002 - -
H8S1 245 - 0003 - -
H8S2 245 - 0004 - -
H8S3 245 - 0005 - -
MSC1/Circ.1252
2. Measurements (FA-100)
Checking Items Result
Source of energy Main Emergency Reserve

Pilot plug arrangement N/A Yes
Static information Good (Ship name, MMSI, Callsign, Type of Vessel, etc)
Dynamic information Good (Time, Pos, SOG, COG, Heading, Nav status, etc)
Voyage related information Good (Draft, Type of cargo, etc)
Alarm test Good .
Self-check (built - in) test Good .
Operation test (if applicable) Good .
Operation & Maintenance Manual Good .
161.975 MHz 162.025 MHz 156.525 MHz
(AIS-1:Ch87) (AIS-2:Ch88)) (Ch70)
Transmitter Power and +20 %: +20 %: +20 %:
Frequency error / / W / / W / / W
+3 ppm: +3 ppm: +3 ppm:
Hz Hz Hz
3. Interconnection Diagram (FA-100)

GPS ANT VHF ANT
(GPA-17S) (150M-W2VN)
GPS/VHF ANT (FAB-151D)
(GSC-001-FA)
GVA-100
SNSR-3 Sensor
SNSR-2 Sensor
SNSR-1 Sensor
VHF ANT CB-100

Beacon RCVR
DB-1
for DGPS
GPS ANT Extra-1
Long Range
PC I/O
External ALM
EX1pps
FA-100
Extra-2
[J2:EXTRA I/O]
LAN
AD-10 AD-100
AC MAIN VAC
Power Supply POWER
Alternative Source: 24VDC ( Type: ) LOG
(contact) Log
( EMG / RES / COMM / Other) Not used
External GPS
Remarks
MSC1/Circ.1252
Reported by:
Date: / /
1. AIS Initial Setting List (FA-150)
MMSI
IMO# 00
MMSI
NAME
C.SIN
SET INT ANT POS A, B, C, D A: B: C: D:
SET EXT ANT POS A, B, C, D A: B: C: D:
SET SHIP TYPE 10 -- 90 Ex; 70 (Cargo ship)
MODE LONG RANGE / EXT DISPLAY
COM 1
SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2
MODE EXT DISPLAY / MONITOR / HI LEVEL IF
COM 2
SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2
MODE EXT DISPLAY / MONITOR / HI LEVEL IF
SET COM 3
SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2
COM
SENSOR SENSOR
PORT COM 4
SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2
SENSOR SENSOR
COM 5
SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2
SET I/O SENSOR SENSOR

COM 6
PORT SPEED IEC61162-1 / IEC61162-2 / AD10
MODE STANDARD / MONITOR / SEFRVICE / BEACON
SET PC PORT
SPEED 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k / 54.7k
MODE STANDARD / MONITOR / SEFRVICE
IP ADDRESS: 172.031.024.001
Changed:
SET LAN PORT IP SUBNET MASK: 255.255.000.000
ADDRESS Changed:
PORT No. 10000
Changed:
L/L
SET SOG, COM 4, 5, 6
COG Default
PRIORTY HDG -> 1, 2, 3
ROT
Program Version
FA-1501: 2450018-01. FA-1502: 2450021-01.
MSC1/Circ.1252
2. Measurements (FA-150)
Checking Items Result
Source of energy Main Emergency Reserve

Pilot plug arrangement N/A Yes
Static information Good (Ship name, MMSI, Callsign, Type of Vessel, etc)
Dynamic information Good (Time, Pos, SOG, COG, Heading, Nav status, etc)
Voyage related information Good (Draft, Type of cargo, etc)
Alarm test Good .
Self-check (built - in) test Good .
Operation test (if applicable) Good .
Operation & Maintenance Manual Good .
161.975 MHz 162.025 MHz 156.525 MHz
(AIS-1:Ch87) (AIS-2:Ch88)) (Ch70)
Transmitter Power and +20 %: +20 %: +20 %:
Frequency error / / W / / W / / W
+3 ppm: +3 ppm: +3 ppm:
Hz Hz Hz
3. Interconnection Diagram (FA-150)
GPS ANT VHF ANT

(GPA-17S) (150M-W2VN)
GPS/VHF ANT (FAB-151D)
(GSC-001-FA)
GVA-100 DISP
FA-1502
FA-1501
COM 1
COM 2
VHF ANT
COM 3
DB-1
GPS ANT
COM 4
LAN COM 5
RS-232C COM 6
EXT ALM
AC MAIN VAC
Power Supply Remarks
Alternative Source: 24VDC ( Type: )
( EMG / RES / COMM / Other)
MSC1/Crcr.1252
4. Antenna Lay out Grid Scale: m
No. Antenna
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
MSC1/Crcr.1252
4. Antenna Lay out Grid Scale: m
No. Antenna
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Contents
Contents
Setting and Checking Guide
Chapter 1. Overview
1.1 System overview ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
1.1.1 Automatic Identification System (AIS) ･･････････････････････････ 1-1
1.1.2 System Operation ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 1-3
1. Operation of AIS････････････････････････････････････････ 1-3
2. Classification of AIS equipment････････････････････････････ 1-4
1.2 Configuration ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5

1.2.1 Configuration of FA-150 ･････････････････････････････････････ 1-5
1.2.2 Installations ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-6
Chapter 2. Parts Location

2.1 Transponder Unit : FA-1501･･･････････････････････････････････････ 2-1
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-4
2.3 Monitor Unit: FA1502 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 2-9
2.4 Combined Antenna: GVA-100 ････････････････････････････････････ 2-11
2.5 AC-DC Power supply: PR-240-CE ････････････････････････････････ 2-14
Chapter 3. System Setting

3.1 Overview of Initial Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-1
3.2 Initial Settings･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-2

3.2.1 MMSI, IMO No., Ship name and Call sign Settings････････････････ 3-2
3.2.2 SET INT ANT POS and SET EXT ANT POS Settings･･････････････ 3-3
3.2.3 SET SHIP TYPE Setting ･････････････････････････････････････ 3-4
3.3 I/O Port Settings ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-6

3.3.1 Arrangement of connection ports ･･････････････････････････････ 3-6
3.3.2 I/O sentence table of COM, PC port ････････････････････････････ 3-7
3.3.3 SET COM PORT Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････ 3-10
1. COM1 Setting･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 3-10
2. COM2 and COM3 port Settings･････････････････････････････ 3-12
1
Contents
3. COM4 and COM5 port Settings･････････････････････････････ 3-13

4. COM6 Setting･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 3-15
3.3.4 SET PC PORT Setting ･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-16
3.3.5 SET LAN PORT Setting ････････････････････････････････････ 3-18
3.3.6 SET PRIORITY Setting ････････････････････････････････････ 3-21
3.4 EXT ALM Output Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-22

3.5 CH MODE Setting ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-23
3.6 Regional operating channels Setting ･･･････････････････････････････ 3-24
3.7 USER SETTINGS ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-27
3.8 Connecting a Second FA-1502 Connecting ･･････････････････････････ 3-28
3.9 PR-240 input voltage modification ････････････････････････････････ 3-29
Chapter 4. Menu Tree

4.1 [DISP]････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-1
4.2 [NAV STATUS] ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-2

4.3 [MENU] ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-3
Chapter 5. Block Description

5.1 Overall Block Diagram ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-1
5.1.1 Overall block diagram ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-1
5.1.2 Outline of Board ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-3
1. FA-1501 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-3
2. FA-1502 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-3
5.2 FA-1501 Block Description ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-4

5.2.1 TX Board (24P0032) ････････････････････････････････････････ 5-4
5.2.2 RX-1 (24P0033A) and RX-2 (24P0033B) Boards ･････････････････ 5-9
5.2.3 DSC Board (24P0034)･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-12
5.2.4 MAIN Board (24P0035) ････････････････････････････････････ 5-14
5.2.5 MOT Board (24P0036) ･････････････････････････････････････ 5-16
5.2.6 PWR Board (24P0037) ･････････････････････････････････････ 5-17
5.3 FA-1502 Block Description ･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-20
2
Contents
Chapter 6. Updating Program

6.1 General ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1
6.1.1 Program files ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1
6.1.2 Preliminary Notes on Software Updates ･････････････････････････ 6-2
6.1.3 Procedure for rewriting the COM Port for the batch file
so that it will use some other COM port on your PC ･･･････････ 6-2
6.1.4 Confirming program numbers ･････････････････････････････････ 6-3
6.1.5 Connection････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-4
6.2 Updating Procedure ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-5

6.2.1 Procedure ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-5
Chapter 7. Measurement
7.1 General ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1
7.1.1 Measurement Flow ･････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1
7.1.2 Connection of Measuring Instrument ･･･････････････････････････ 7-2
7.2 Measurement and Adjustment ･････････････････････････････････････ 7-3

7.2.1 Measurement of TX Output power and TX frequency ･･････････････ 7-3
7.2.2 Adjusting TX output power ･･･････････････････････････････････ 7-6
7.2.3 Adjusting TX output frequency ････････････････････････････････ 7-6
Chapter 8. Maintenance
Introduction ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-1
8.1 ALARM STATUS･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2

8.1.1 Alarm status: DISP -> ALARM STATUS ････････････････････････ 8-2
8.1.2 Alarm status analysis ････････････････････････････････････････ 8-4
8.2 SENSOR STATUS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-7

8.2.1 Confirm sensor input currently in use ･･･････････････････････････ 8-7
8.2.2 Handling of sensors ･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-7
1. Sentences required by AIS ･･････････････････････････････････ 8-7
2. Input/Output sentences for each MODE setting･･････････････････ 8-8
3. Processing of sentences ････････････････････････････････････ 8-8
8.3 INTERNAL GPS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13
3
Contents
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-14

8.4.1 MONITOR TEST ･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-14
8.4.2 TRANSPONDER TEST ････････････････････････････････････ 8-16
1. MEMORY TEST ････････････････････････････････････････ 8-16
2. GPS TEST ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-16
8.4.3 PWR ON/OFF HISTORY ･･･････････････････････････････････ 8-17
8.4.4 TX ON/OFF HISTORY･････････････････････････････････････ 8-18
8.4.5 MEMORY CLEAR ････････････････････････････････････････ 8-18
8.5 FOR SERVICE ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-19

8.5.1 CH & PWR SETTINGS ････････････････････････････････････ 8-19
8.5.2 TX TEST ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-20
8.5.3 RX TEST ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-20
8.5.4 I/O PORT TEST ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-21
8.5.5 ALARM HISTORY････････････････････････････････････････ 8-22
8.5.6 I/O MONITOR ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-22
8.5.7 OTHER ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-23
1. SIM MODE ････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-23
2. ALARM MODE ･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-25
3. CH MODE ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-25
4. ALL CLEAR････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-25
5. DEBUG MENU ･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-25
6. SILENT MENU ･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-28
7. CHECK SUM ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 8-29
8.6 LED ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-30

8.6.1 MAIN board ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-30
8.6.2 TX board ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-31
8.7 DIP Switch Setting ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-32

8.7.1 MAIN board ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-32
8.8 Popup message list ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-33
8.9 Trouble Shooting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-37

Case 1) “Communication Error” is shown. ･･･････････････････････････ 8-37
Case 2) “TX” error is shown. ･･････････････････････････････････････ 8-38
Case 3) EPFS, L/L, SOG, COG, HDT or ROT error is shown. ････････････ 8-39
Case 4) Receiving targets get less or no. ･････････････････････････････ 8-41
Case 5) Received targets are not displayed on the Radar (FAR-2xx7 series) ･ 8-42
4
Contents
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q1: Strange characters are displayed on the target list. What do they mean? ･･････ 9-1
Q2: It seems to take long time to display the Name of Ship. ･･･････････････････ 9-1
Q3: Does FA-150 have a polling function? ････････････････････････････････ 9-1
Q4: Second FA-1502 can be connected? ･･････････････････････････････････ 9-1
Q5: COMMUNICATION ERROR is displayed. Where should I check?････････ 9-1
Q6: Are settings of DIM and CONTRAST stored in memory
even if the power is turned off? ･････････････････････････････････････ 9-1
Q7: Where is the tanker mode setting carried out? ･･････････････････････････ 9-2
Q8. Is it possible to connect sensors to COM1, COM2 and COM3 ports? ････････ 9-2
Q9: Is NMEA Ver-1.5 able to be used as sensor input? ･･･････････････････････ 9-2
Q10: How to check sensor input. ････････････････････････････････････････ 9-2
Q11: How to check whether or not transmission is taking place. ･･･････････････ 9-3
Q12: What does the antenna mark on the top right of a screen for
OWN DYNAMIC DATA? ････････････････････････････････････････ 9-3
Q13: Can FA-150 receive Distress alert or Individual calling of VHF DSC? ･･････ 9-3
Q14: The alarm output ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-3
Q15:What is the USCG mode?･･････････････････････････････････････････ 9-4
Q16: What is optional FAISPC-MARK2? ･････････････････････････････････ 9-4
Q17: I want to demonstrate FA-150 for an exhibition.････････････････････････ 9-4
Q18: Targets lost conditions ････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-5
Q19: To which port should NAVNET 2 be connected? ･･･････････････････････ 9-5
Q20: What sentences are VDO and VDM? ････････････････････････････････ 9-5
Q21: Could we use FA-100 GPS antenna?･････････････････････････････････ 9-6
Q22: What Msg. type should be selected when transmitting the test message? ････ 9-6
Q23: Handling of messages ････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-7
Q24: Where are frequency and output power adjusted?･･･････････････････････ 9-7
Q25: How long is the AIS communication range? ･･･････････････････････････ 9-8
5
Contents
Appendix 1. Specifications ･････････････････････････････････････ AP1-1
Appendix 2. VHF Channel List ･････････････････････････････････ AP2-1
Appendix 3. AIS Messages ･････････････････････････････････････ AP3-1
Appendix 4. IEC-61162 sentence ･･･････････････････････････････ AP4-1
Appendix 5. FAISPC MARK2 ･･･････････････････････････････････ AP5-1
Part List ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ E-1
Contents of Drawings ･････････････････････････････････････････････ S-0
6
1. Operating voltage of Power unit: PR-240 (See page 3-29.)

Operating voltage of the PR-240 is jumper-selectable to 115 VAC or 230 VAC
(factory-default: 230 VAC). Check the jumper setting on the PR-240.
** The AIS is required alternative source, for example emergency source. **
2. Have you waterproofed Antenna?
3. Have you set the output sentence of GPS?

Set the output sentence of GPS. FA-150 accepts sentences of IEC61162 (NMEA Ver. 2.0
or higher). In addition, set the sentence transmission interval of GPS to 1 second. In the
event that IEC61162 data is not inputted for more than 5 seconds, AIS outputs an error
message.
Acceptable sentence and

Equipment Example
priority
Position GNS>GLL>GGA>RMC RMC
Speed Over Ground VBWNote1）>RMC>VTG>OSDNote1） GNS, GLL
GPS Course Over Ground RMC>VTG>OSDNote1） GGA, VTG
Land surveying DTM DTM (WGS-84)
RAIM GBS
Gyro HDT>OSDNote1）>AD format HDT
Rate of Ture indicator $TI ROT> Calculated $TI ROT
Note1 :
VBW is a sentence outputted from the speed and distance measuring devices and
OSD from radar.
Note 2:
To be connected if $TI-ROT sentence is outputted from the ROT meter.
4. Check connection with the External equipment. (See page 3-6.)

Confirm the equipment to be connected.
- SENSOR: GPS, HDG, ROT - EXT DISPLAY: RADAR, ECDIS
- MONITOR: additional FA-1502 - HI LEVEL IF: NAVNET 2
Port Equipment
COM 1 LONG RANGE EXT DISPLAY
COM 2 EXT DISPLAY MONITOR HI LEVEL IF
COM 3 EXT DISPLAY MONITOR HI LEVEL IF
COM 4 SENSOR EXT DISPLAY
COM 5 SENSOR
COM 6 SENSOR AD-10
i
5. Carry out INITIAL SETTINGS. (See page 3-1.)

Carry out the settings of the table below.
Set items Setting

MMSI
IMO # 00
SET MMSI
NAME
C.SIN
SET INT ANT POS. A, B, C, D A: B: C: D:
SET EXT ANT POS. A, B, C, D A: B: C: D:
SET SHIP TYPE 10 – 90 Ex) 70: Cargo
MODE LONG RANGE/ EXT DISPLAY
COM 1
SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2
MODE EXT DISPLAY/MONITOR/HI LEVEL IF
COM 2
SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2
MODE EXT DISPLAY/MONITOR/HI LEVEL IF
SET COM 3
SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2
COM
MODE SENSOR/ EXT DISPLAY
PORT COM 4
SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2
SENSOR SENSOR
COM 5
SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2
SET
SENSOR SENSOR
I/O COM 6
PORT SPEED IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-2/AD10
SET MODE STANDARD/MONITOR/SERVICE/BEACON
PC PORT SPEED 4800/9600/19.2k/38.4k/57.6kbps
MODE, STANDARD/MONITOR/SERVICE
SET IP ADDRESS: 172.031.024.001
LAN PORT IP settings SUBNET MASK: 255.255.000.000
PORT No: 10000
L/L,
SET COG, SOG COM 4, 5,
Default
PRIORITY HDG 6 -> 1, 2, 3
ROT
- SENSOR SPEED: IEC61162-1(4800 bps)

- EXT DISPLAY, MONITOR, HI LEVEL IF SPEED: IEC61162-2(38.4 kbps)
ii
6. Make sure no alarm is generated. (See page 8-2.)

If any alarm is detected, the generated alarm is displayed by popup display. In addition,
the generated alarm list is displayed by [DISP] -> ALARM STATUS.
7. Confirm Program Ver. and carry out diagnostics.

(See pages 6-3, 8-14 through 16.)
- Confirm program No. of FA-150 and diagnostics test.
Execute [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS -> TRANSPONDER TEST ->
MEMORY TEST.
FA-1501 FA-1502
2450018-01.0x ( ) 2450021-01.0x ( )
8. Make sure sensor input is automatically changed over.

Check the use condition by [MENU] -> SENSOR STATUS and confirm whether or not
the GPS data is changed over by the following method.
- If the internal GPS is used presently;
Disconnect GPS antenna connector of FA-1501.
- If the external GPS is used presently;
Turn off the power supply of external GPS. It would take 30 seconds at
maximum to change over data.
9. Make sure AIS target is received.

In [DISP] -> TARGET LIST, the list of ships whose data are received is displayed.
10. Make sure transmission is being carried out.

If the [DISP] -> OWN DYNAMIC DATA antenna mark blinks to the transmission
interval while the reporting data is being transmitted, transmission is properly carried
out. The antenna mark means the following:
- Antenna mark is displayed;
It indicates that the system is being synchronized with UTC of built-in GPS. The
antenna mark disappears if the system is not synchronized with the built-in GPS.
- Antenna mark blinks;
The antenna mark blinks to the transmission interval.
[OWN DIYNAMIC DATA]

22/JUN/2005 06:43:20
LAT : 34 27.8412’N
LON : 135 25.1232’E
SOG : 10.0kt EXT GPS
COG : 57.0 HDG : 123
ROT : R10.0 /min
PA : H RAIM : USE
iii
11. Make sure AIS target is displayed on Radar and ECDIS.
12. Confirm Tx output power and transmission frequency. (See page 7-2.)
Confirm as required.
First of all, set transmission output and channels by [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> CH
& PWR SETTINGS.
Then, confirm by [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> TX TEST.
Upon completion of this test, be sure to turn MODE of CH & PWR SETTINGS from
MANUAL to AUTO.
Transmission output (±20 %) Frequency tolerance

Channel
12.5W 2W 1W (±3 ppm)
CH 87(AIS) 161.975 MHz
CH 88(AIS) 162.025 MHz
CH 70(DSC) 156.525 MHz
CH
CH
13. Interference to VHF.

Check that FA-150 dose not interfere to No.1 and No.2 VHF R/T with the SQ set to off.
Note that the ship is at anchor, the transmission interval of AIS is 3 minutes.
14. Carry out transmission and reception test of AIS message.

1. Carry out the following settings by [MENU]: -> MSG -> SET MSG TYPE.
- ADDRESS TYPE : ADDRESS CAST
- MMSI : Entry of MMSI
- MSG TYPE : SAFETY
- CHANNEL : BOTH
2. Create appropriate sentence by [MENU] -> MSG -> SET MSG.
3. Transmit the message by [MENU] -> MSG -> SEND MSG.
4. If the acknowledgment is received from the called station, popup display “SEND
MESSAGE COMPLETE MMSI xxxxxxxxx” is given. If the acknowledgment from
the called station is not received, popup display “SEND MESSAGE
UNSUCCESSFUL MMSI xxxxxxxxx” is given. In this case that the message
transmitted to the called station did not reach or the acknowledgment from the called
station is not received.
MSG 12
(1) (2)
Trying up to 4 times
(3)
SEND MSG
MSG 13
Transmitting message Transmitting ACK
within 4 seconds within 4 seconds
iv
15. Confirm the operation of EXT ALM (See pages 8-2 and 3-22.)
Are EXT ALM signals correctly connected to the alarm system, etc.?
Make sure EXT ALM signal turns ON and alarm of the Alarm system is initiated when
alarm is generated and for example, external GPS power supply is turned OFF.
In addition, make sure EXT ALM signal is turned OFF by ALM ACK signal from the
Alarm system.
16. Check the Pilot plug.

Connect PC to the pilot plug unit as illustrated below.
Pilot Pulag unit

COM1, 2, 3
(0P24-3)
RS-422 RS-232C
Level Converter
#1: DCD
#1 TD-A 1 #1:TD-A RD-A TxD
FA-150
#2: RxD
RS-232C-422
#2 TD-B 2 #4:TD-B RD-B RxD
#3: TxD
#4 RD-A 3 #5:RD-A TD-A #4: DTR
GND
PC
#5 RD-B 4 #6:RD-B TD-B #5: GND
#3 Giso 5 #9:Shield #6: DSR
#7: RTS
#8: CTS
#9: RI
[COM Port]
Preparation
1. Confirm NAV STATUS by [DISP] -> NAV STATUS menu of FA-150. If default
value 15: Not defined is displayed, set the value other than 15.
2. Set the pilot plug connection port.

MODE: EXT DISPLAY, SPEED: IEC61162-2 (38.4 kbps)
3. Create the following sentence by “Ward pad, Note pad” etc. and prepare a text
document. Be sure to feed line at the end of a sentence by pressing Enter.
- Sentence to set NAV STATUS to “15: Not Defined.”
$AIVSD,,,,,,,,15,*61 Enter
$AIVSD,,,,,,,,15,*61 Enter
- Sentence to send message “TEST MESSAGE” to MMSI:000000001 station by
MSG12 through CH-A.
$AIABM,1,1,0,000000001, 1, 12, D5CDP=5CC175,0*58 Enter
v
4. Boot the hyper terminal of PC and set the following.

1) Choose [File] -> “Property,” click Configure of [Connect To] tab
menu, and carry out the following settings.
Bit/sec: 38400
Data bit: 8
Parity: none
Stop bit: 1
Flow control: none
2) Open [Settings] tab menu of “Property,” click ASCII setting, and carry out the
following settings.
Tick off “Send line ends with

line feeds” and “Local Echo.”
Confirmation of RD line
5. Upon completion of the above settings, display a sentence received from FA-150 on
the hyper terminal screen.
Alarm message that external EPFS error occurred.
AIALM：Alarm
VDO：VHF Data Link Own vessel Message
VDM：VHF Data Link Message
Message sent by CH-B
Message received by CH-A
vi
Confirmation of TD line
6. To confirm transmission, choose [TRANSFER] -> “Send Text File” and choose the
text file of “NAV STATUS” prepared in step 3.
To send the text file prepared in

“Send Text File.”
7. On the hyper terminal screen, the sentence: $AIVSD--- transmitted is displayed.
VSD：Voyage Static Data
Set NAV STATUS to “15.”

(When file is transmitted, local echo is displayed.)
8. Make sure NAV STATUS is set from PC by FA-150.

Make sure that “15: Not Defined” is set by [DISP] -> NAV STATUS of FA-150.
Be sure to reinstate the NAV STATUS setting.
vii
Transmission of test message

9. Send a message to a fictitious station by MSG.12. On the hyper terminal screen, the
transmitted sentence: $AIVDO--- is displayed.
Transmission of message
(Transmitting a file displays local echo.)
First message sent by CH-A
Second message sent by CH-A
Third message sent by CH-A
10. Make sure whether or not the message was sent from PC.
Open [MENU] -> MEG -> TX LOG and make sure the transmitted message “TEST
MESSAGE” is recorded.
17. Have you done enough operational on FA-150 to user?

1) How to turn ON the power supply;
There are two power switches: FA-1501 and FA-1502. In addition, explain the
requirements to turn OFF the AIS power supply on the basis of A.917.
(See page 8-17.)
2) Explanation of each item of [DISP] -> NAV STATUS and setting method.
(See page 3-4.)
3) Since the ship’s name, call sign, and other static data are notified every 6 minutes,
these pieces of data are not immediately displayed as is the case of position data.
(See page 1-2.)
4) Settings of CPA/TCPA ALARM and RCVD MSG BUZZ of [MENU] -> USER
SETTINGS menu. (See page 3-27.)
viii
Chapter 1. Overview
1.1 System overview
1.1 System overview

1.1.1 Automatic Identification System (AIS)
The FA-150 is a universal AIS (Automatic Identification System). It complies with IMO
MSC.74(69) Annex 3, A.694, ITU-R M.1371-1 and DSC ITU-R M.825.
It also complies with IEC61993-2 (Type testing standard), IEC60945 (EMC and
environmental conditions).
The AIS (Automatic Identification System) capable of exchanging data between own
ship and other ships or coastal stations (VTS). The information obtained by AIS such as
Ship names, MMSI, Call signs and other identification information, positional
information, navigation information, etc. can improve the quality of information which
the deck officer uses. By supplementing information obtained from Radar, AIS can
contribute to avoiding of collisions between ships.
The system operates in three modes - autonomous (continuous operation in all areas),
assigned (data transmission interval remotely controlled by authority in traffic
monitoring service) and polled (in response to interrogation from a ship or authority).
It synchronized with GPS time to avoid conflict among multiple users (IMO minimum
2,000 is reports per minute and IEC requires 4,500 reports on two channels). The VHF
channels 87B and 88B are commonly used and in addition there are local AIS
frequencies. Ship-borne AIS transponders exchange various data as specified by the
IMO and ITU on either frequency automatically set up by the frequency management
telecommand received by the DSC receiver on ship.
IMMARSAT-C
Satellite communication - Traffic control of ships
(future plan) - Providing information on
navigational safety
LES
AIS transponder VHF
FA-150
Position, heading,
speed, etc. Destination and loading
Name, call sign,

type of ship, size of ship, etc. Navigation, control, port, AIS base station
GPS differential correction VTS base station
information
- Identification of ships
- Support to acquisition of other ships
Safety-related - Exchanging information to avoid collisions
information
Fig. 1.1.1 AIS conceptual drawing
1-1
1.1 System overview
Dynamic data has the reporting (transmission) interval varied from 3 minutes to 2
seconds in accord with ship speed and course change. In addition, dynamic data is
transmitted in response to requests of VTS or other ships.
Static data and voyage-related data are reported every 6 minutes or as requested.
Table 1.1.1 Information content

Dynamic data Static data Voyage-related Voyage-safety
(Msg. 1, 2, 3) (Msg. 5) data (Msg.5) related message
Position (WGS-84) MMSI Draught
UTC Call sign Hazardous cargo Messages are
Positional accuracy Ship’s name Destination, ETA freely prepared
SOG (Speed Over Ground) (as required)
IMO No.
COG (Course Over Ground)
Heading Length and beam Safety
Type of ship Navigation status Msg. 12, 14
Location of Binary
Rate of turn Msg.6, 8
position-fixing antenna
on the ship
Table 1.1.2 Reporting interval of dynamic data
Ship’s navigation status Reporting interval

Ship at anchor or moored, less than 3 knot 3 min.
Ship at anchor or moored, 3 knot or more 10 sec
0-14 knot speed 10 sec
0-14 knot speed with course change 3 1/3 sec
14-23 knot speed 6 sec
14-23 knot speed with course change 2 sec
Speed higher than 23 knot 2 sec
Speed higher than 23 knot, with course change 2 sec
Note:
- Changing course; When the heading data is changed more than 10 deg./min.
- The time for changing the report rate is as follows.
When the ship’s speed is up; about 1 minute.
When the ship’s speed is down; 3 to 4 minutes
1-2
1.1 System overview
1.1.2 System Operation

1. Operation of AIS
The AIS transponder uses 9.6 kbps Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) FM
modulation over 25 or 12.5 kHz channels defined by ITU-R Rec. 1084-2 and Appendix
S18 of RR, using HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) packed protocols. Each
station transmits and receives over two radio channels to avoid interference problems,
and to be shifted without communications loss from other ships. These channels are
allocated to the international channel and regional frequency.
- AIS1: 161.975 MHz (CH87B; 2087)
- AIS2: 162.025 MHz (CH88B; 2088)
- Regional frequency (156.025 MHz to 162.025 MHz)
The operation of regional frequency is assigned from 20 to 200 NM rectangle area. The
operation on these channels is accomplished by the following means:
- VHF DSC (CH70) commands from shore-based AIS;
- TDMA (AIS message) commands from shore-based AIS;
** Refer to Message 22: Channel management **
- Commands from shipboard system such as ECDIS, etc. (ACA); and
- Manual inputs (PFEC).
Table 1.1.3 Link list
Parameter Description
Regional frequencies (RR AP18) 156.025 MHz to 025 MHz
Channel spacing 12.5 kHz/25 kHz(used over international waters)
AIS1 CH87B: 2087 161.975 MHz
AIS2 CH88B: 2088 162.025 MHz
Tx BT=0.3 Rx BT=0.3/0.5
Narrow (12.5 kHz)
(Modulation index = 0.25)
Bandwidth
Tx BT=0.4 Rx BT=0.5
Wide (25 kHz)
(Modulation index = 0.5)
Bit rate 9600 bps
Number of bits per 1 slot 256 bits
Modulation GMSK (Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying)
Frequency tolerance Within ±3 ppm
Transmission output power 12.5 W / 2W + 20 %
BT: Bandwidth Time Product
1-3
1.1 System overview
AIS uses a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) technique synchronized with UTC.
This technique uses a concept of frame, in which 1 frame is equal to 1 minute and is
divided into 2,250 slots. With two channels, the communication capacity of 4,500
slots/minute is available.
1 Frame
1 min. CH87B:161.975MHz
CH88B:162.025MHz
2250 Slot
256 bits
9600 bps
EX)Nominal slot EX)Occupied slot
(名目上のスロット) (占有スロット）
Fig. 1.1.2 AIS Concept of AIS slot
Data is transferred using a transmission packet as show in below. The packet should be
sent from left to right. This structure is identical to the general HDLC structure, except
for the training sequence. The total length of the default packet is 256 bits. This is
equivalent to one slot.
Training Seq. Start flag Data(Long Tx Packets) FCS End flag Buffering
24 bits 8 bits 168 bit 16 bits 8 bits 24 bits
Ramp up: 8 bits Total: 256 bits
2. Classification of AIS equipment

The AIS ship mobile station equipment is available with Class A and Class B. FA-150 is
a type-approved “AIS Class A” .
- Class A:
This is the equipment that complies with IMO AIS performance standard.
- Class B:
This is the equipment that complies with IEC standard for ships in which AIS
installation is not mandatory. The message report interval of dynamic data is 30
seconds and 3 minutes, while the message report interval of static data is 6 minutes.
1-4
1.2 Configuration
1.2 Configuration
1.2.1 Configuration of FA-150
The FA-150 consists of VHF and GPS antennas, a transponder unit, a monitor unit, and
several associated units.
The transponder contains a VHF transmitter, two TDMA receivers on two parallel VHF
channels, a DSC channel 70 receiver, interface, communication processor, and internal
GPS receiver.
GPS/VHF Antenna
FA-1502(MKD) GVA-100
24 VDC
GPS Navigator
Own ship’s position

(L/L)
Speed over ground
RS-422 (SOG)
Course over ground
(COG)
FA-1501
Radar (AIS Transponder) Gyrocompass
ECDIS
Pilot plug
Heading (HDT)
$TI ROT
Rate of Turn
(where available)
RS-232C
LAN
24 VDC
100, 220 VAC in
1. Port
- COM1-COM6 (Serial Port)
PR-240-CE - RS-232C Port
- LAN Port (Option)
- DISP Port (for MKD)
For PC display: FAISPC MARK2 2. Power supply: +12 VDC to +24 VDC
3. Antenna
- Combined antenna (GVA-100)
- GPS antenna (GSC-100, GPA-017S)
- VHF antenna (FAB-151D, 150M-W2VN)
Fig. 1.2.1 Configuration of FA-150
1-5
1.2 Configuration
1.2.2 Installations
1. Ports for serial I/O interface are six ports COM1 through COM6. All ports are
supported with IEC61162-1 and 2 interfaces, in addition COM 4 to COM6 are
supported with C.Loop interface. For sensor input ports are COM4, COM5, and
COM6 ports.
2. Necessary sensors are own ship’s position (L/L), speed over ground (SOG), course
over ground (COG), and heading (HDT). If a rate of turn (ROT) indicator is available
an IEC61162 interface, it should be connected to the AIS.
Data Required Optional

Reference datum DTM
Position information GNS, GLL GGA, RMC
SOG (Speed Over Ground) VBW VTG, OSD, RMC
COG (Course Over Ground) RMC VTG, OSD
Heading HDT OSD
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) GBS
ROT (Rate of Turn) $TI ROT
3. PC can be connected to PC port or LAN port.

When PC is connected to LAN port, NET-100 board (option) should be mounted to
FA-1501.
4. NAVNET 2 may be connected to FA-150 for AIS reception data display.

NAVNET 2 should be connected to either COM2 or COM3 in FA-1501, and MODE
and SPEED setting of connected COM port should be set to “HI LEVEL IF” and
“IEC61162-2.”
5. Maximum 2 sets of MKD (Minimum Keyboard and Display): FA-1502 can be

connected. The second FA-1502 should be connected to either COM2 or COM3, and
MODE and SPEED setting of connected COM port should be set to “MONITOR”
and “IEC61162-2”.
6. When PC is used for a display, PC version displays software: FAISPC MARK2

(Option) should be installed to PC. The PC version display cannot serve as a
substitute for MKD (FA-1502), to which care should be taken.
7. For the antenna, combined antenna (GVA-100) or separate VHF antenna and GPS
antenna can choose.
1-6
1.2 Configuration
8. In order to reduce interference between VHF and AIS:

1) The AIS VHF antenna should be installed safety away from interfering high-power
energy sources like radar and other transmitting radio antenna, preferably at least 3
meters away from and out of the transmitting beam.
2) Ideally there should no be more than one antenna on the same level. The AIS VHF
antenna should be mounted directly above or below the ship’s primary VHF
radiotelephone antenna, with no horizontal separation and with a minimum of 2 m
vertical separation. If it is located on the same level as other antennas, the distance
apart should be at least 10 m.
Reference:
The AIS VHF antenna should be placed in an elevated position that is as free as
possible with a minimum of 2 m in horizontal direction from constructions made of
conductive materials. The antenna should not be installed close to any large
vertical obstruction. The objective for the AIS VHF antenna is to see the horizon
freely though 360 degrees.
9. The AIS and associated sensors should be powered from the ship’s main source of
electrical energy. In addition, it should be possible to operate the AIS and associated
sensors from an alternative source of electrical energy.
10. The AIS should be installed to places where the ship is normal navigated and as well
as where the deck officer can operate FA-150 or the conning position.
For example, it is recommended to mount the AIS in the vicinity of places where
Radar or ECDIS is mounted, or the center of chart table or conning position.
11. For vessels which transiting through Panama Canal and sailing Saint Lawrence
River in seaway, in addition, vessels that come in ports of the United States, a Pilot
plug is required.
The Pilot plug should be installed on the bridge near the pilot’s operating position.
For the Pilot plug, “AIS Pilot Plug” shall be indicated with an appropriate label.
In addition, an AC plug for PC power supply of the pilot must be installed near the
Pilot plug, too. For the receptacle, “Receptacle for Pilot PC” must be indicated.
Pilot Plug
AMP/Receptacle (Square Flanged (-1) or Free-Hanging (2)), Shell size 11, 9-pin,
Std. Sex 206486-1/2 or equivalent with the following terminations:
- TX A is connected to Pin 1
- TR A is connected to Pin 4
- TX A is connected to Pin 5
- RX B is connected to Pin 6
- Shield is connected to Pin 9
1-7
Chapter 2. Parts Location
2.1 Transponder Unit: FA-1501
2.1 Transponder Unit : FA-1501
Power Switch
Fig. 2.1.1 FA-1501 Top view
Cable Clamp
VHF Antenna Connector

Circuit Breaker (10A) 10A
GND Terminal
INT GPS Antenna Connector
PC Port (RS-232C) LAN Port: RJ45

(Option)
Fig. 2.1.2 FA-1501 Cable entrance
2-1
COM6 COM5
COM4
TX(24P0032) COM3
COM2
COM1
PWR(24P0037)
EXT ALM Power input terminal

DISP Power switch
Fig. 2.1.3 FA-1501 Internal (Top) view (with cover opened)
LED: CR6
(TX monitor)
Fig. 2.1.4 FA-1501 Internal (Top) view (with Shield-cover removed)
2-2
GPS
RX2 (GN 8093)
(24P0033B) RX B
RX1 MAIN
(24P0033A) RX A (24P0035)
DSC(24P0034)
Fig. 2.1.5 FA-1501 Internal (Bottom) view
Fig. 2.1.6 FA-1501 Internal (Bottom) view (with Shield-covers removed)
2-3
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
J1(RX RF)
PA Module
RA35H1516M J2 (ANT)
R133 (TX PWR ADJ.)
TX RF Block LED: CR6 (TX monitor)
PLL Block
J4 (45 MHz)
Q12 (TX 45 MHz Amplifier)
Fig. 2.2.1 TX Board (24P0032)
R25 (FRZQ.) TP51 (For 13.6 VDC check) TP52 (GND)
TP4
(Q54: SW FET-drain)
TP53
（For 5 VDC check）
TP2 (GND)
+10 VDC
TP1
TP3
(Q53: SW FET-drain)
Heat-sink
U54 CR51 Q54 Q53
(5 VDC REG) (REC) (SW FET)
Fig. 2.2.2 PWR Board (24P0037)
2-4
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
TP1
(For checking 1st Lo: 118.161 MHz)
J2 (RX RF)
J4 (RX2 RF)
J1
J3 (RX1 RF)
TP2 TP3 (GND)

(For checking 2nd Lo: 38.4 MHz) 1st Lo Block
(118.161 MHｚ)
Fig. 2.2.3 DSC Board (24P0034)
U1: AD831AP TP3 (U1 OUT// 1st IF)

(1st MIX) RX1: 51.1375 MHz TP5 (RX 2nd Lo)
RX2: 51.2375 MHz
TP1 (GND)
J1 (RX1/RX2 RF)
J2
TP2
(For checking
RX 1ｓt Lo）
PLL RX 1st Lo Block TP4 (For checking PLL RX 1st Lo VCO control voltage)
Fig. 2.2.4 RX1/RX2 Board
2-5
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
LED U6 (SUB CPU)

CR1
CR2 U2 (16 Mbits RAM)
CR3
CR4 U8 (16 Mbits RAM)
S1 (DIP SW)
(Not mounted) Not mounted
S2 (Reset SW)
U18 (FPGA)
GPS (GN8093)
U23 (MAIN CPU)
U24 (128 Mbits RAM)
S2 (DIP SW) LED

CR11 C312 (For RAM Backup)
CR12
U25 (64 Mbits Flash ROM) 9 Pin D-SUB
CR13
CR14
Fig. 2.2.5 MAIN Board (24P0035)
2-6
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
COM6(SENSOR/AD-10) COM5
(SENSOR)
COM4
(EXT DISP/SENSOR)
COM3
(EXT DISP/MONITOR/
HI LEVEL I/F)
COM2
(EXT DISP/MONITOR/
HI LEVEL I/F)
COM１
(EXT DISP/LR)
Power input terminal

Note: Description of EXT ALM
terminals is located DISP
EXT ALM Relay (FA-1502）
on Back of Top Cover.
Fig. 2.2.6 MOT Board (24P0036)
To remove cable, raise slowly,

and then pull out Cable slowly.
When reconnecting Flat Cable,

insert end about 2 mm, and
then secure (a) back.
Fig. 2.2.7 Removal/Insertion of Flat Cable
2-7
2.2 FA-1501 PCBs
Terminal Description Label:
2-8
2.3 Monitor Unit: FA-1502
4.5-inch monochrome LCD

95X60 mm/ 120X64 dots
Fig. 2.3.1 FA-1502 Front view
COM Port
GND terminal
Power input connector

(12 - 24 VDC, 0.30 - 0.15 A)
Fig. 2.3.2 FA-1502 Rear view
2-9
Fig. 2.3.3 FA-1502 Internal view (with Rear cover removed)
Fig. 2.3.4 FA-1502 Internal view (with Shield-cover removed)
2-10
2.4 Combined Antenna: GVA-100
VHF ANT GPS ANT

(150M-W2VN or (GSC-001)
FAB-151D)
VHF ANT Fixing screws x 4
Dia. for Antenna fixing:

40 - 50φ
Fig. 2.4.2 GVA-100 Fixing side
Fig. 2.4.1 GVA-100
2-11
Combined Box (24P0029)
Fig. 2.4.3 GVA-100 Bottom cover removed
Combiner Board (24P0029)
Fig. 2.4.4 Combined Box cover removed
2-12
24P0029
Fig. 2.4.5 Distributor (DB-1)
2-13
2.5 AC-DC Power supply: PR-240-CE
2.5 AC-DC Power supply: PR-240-CE
CB-1 (DC OUT) CB-2 (AC IN)

12 A DC Breaker 5 A AC Breaker
K1: AC-OFF detection
K2: Backup
ON/OFF
Fuse
(250 V HT6.3A)
Wiring change for AC

input voltage selection
(115 V /230V)
VR1,
for 24 VDC output
voltage adjustment
Jumper Wire for AC input voltage

selection (115 V/230 V) (note)
Note: For AC input voltage selection, see page 3-29 for details.
2-14
Chapter 3. System Setting
3.1 Overview of Initial Settings

Items to be set are as follows. To open the Initial Settings menu, the password must be
entered. See FQ4-2005-012 for the password or refer to Fig. 3.1.1.
Table 3.1.1 Initial Settings Menu
MENU-1 MENU-2 MENU-3 MENU-4 Setting

MMSI
IMO #
SET MMSI
NAME
C.SIN
SET INT ANT POS. A, B, C, D
SET EXT ANT
A, B, C, D
POS.
10 - 90 (Number of tens only)
SET SHIP TYPE Cargo type ->
[NAV STATUS]
COM 1 MODE and SPEED
COM 2 MODE and SPEED
SET
INITIAL COM 3 MODE and SPEED
COM
SETTINGS COM 4 MODE and SPEED
PORT
COM 5 SENSOR SPEED
COM 6 SENSOR SPEED
SET
MODE and SPEED
PC PORT
SET I/O PORT
MODE,
SET IP ADDRESS,
LAN PORT SUBNET MASK,
and PORT No.
L/L,
COM 4, 5, 6 -> 1, 2, 3
SET COG, SOG
PRIORITY HDG COM 4, 5, 6 -> 1, 2, 3
ROT COM 4, 5, 6 -> 1, 2, 3
Data entry/selection method

Use [!] and [] keys on the Cursor-Pad to shift the number of digit positions and [#]
and [$] to choose characters and items, and press the [ENT] key to register data.
Password
Fig. 3.1.1 FA-1501 panel
3-1
3.2 Initial Settings

3.2.1 MMSI, IMO No., Ship name and Call sign Settings
Unless MMSI is entered, the prompt “ENTER MMSI” is displayed on the plotter screen.
In addition, transmission of position report and others are not started.
However, messages can be received.
IMO No., Ship name, and Call sign are transmitted as MSG-5: static data every 6
minutes.
Procedure
1. Press the [MENU] key, choose INITIAL SETTINGS and press the [ENT] key. Then,
the password entry screen appears.
[ENTER PASSWORD]
---------------------
2. Enter the password. Refer to Fig. 3.1.1.

3. The INITIAL SETTINGS entry screen appears.
[INTIAL SETTINGS]
SET MMSI
SET INT ANT POS.
SET EXT ANT POS.
SET TYPE
SET I/O PORT
4. Choose SET MMSI and press the [ENT] key.
[SET MMSI:
MMSI:
IMO#:
NAME
C.SIN
QUIT[MENU]
5. Register MMSI, IMO#, NAME, and C.SIN by the Cursor-Pad.

- MMSI : Entry of 9-digit MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity).
000000000 indicates that MMSI is not registered.
- IMO# : Enter of 7-digit IMO number following 00. 000000000 indicates that
IMO number is not registered.
- NAME : Enter ship name, up to 20 characters can be entered.
- C.SIN : Enter call sign, up to not 7 characters can be entered.
Every time each item is entered, press the [ENT] key, and then, enter the next item.
On completion of settings, press the [MENU] key to escape this screen.
3-2
3.2.2 SET INT ANT POS and SET EXT ANT POS Settings
Enter the internal GPS antenna position: SET INT ANT POS and the external GPS
antenna position: SET EXT ANT POS connected as a sensor input.
The data registered here is transmitted as static data; MSG-5 every 6 minutes, and the
receiver can calculate the ship length and the width from this data. The antenna position
data is the data of either external or internal GPS used for the present position report
message.
Procedure
1. Press the [MENU] key, choose INITIAL SETTINGS, press the [ENT] key, and enter
the password. Refer to Fig. 3.1.1.
[INITIAL SETTINGS]
SET MMSI
SET INT ANT POS.
SET EXT ANT POS.
SET SHIP TYPE
SET I/O PORT
3. Choose SET ANT POS. and press the [ENT] key.
[SET INT ANT POS>]
A: 0 m
A B: 0 m
C: 0 m
B D: 0 m
QUIT[MENU]
C D
4. Using the Cursor-Pad, enter the position of internal GPS antenna. After entry of each
setting, press the [ENT] key.
- A: distance of GPS antenna from bow ; 0 - 511 m
- B: distance of GPS antenna from stern ; 0 - 511 m
- C: distance of GPS antenna from port ; 0 - 63 m
- D: distance of GPS antenna from starboard ; 0 - 63 m
5. Press the [MENU] key to return to the INITIAL SETTINGS entry screen.
6. Choose SET EXT ANT POS. and press the [ENT] key.
7. Same as SET INT ANT POS., enter the position of the external GPS antenna.
3-3
3.2.3 SET SHIP TYPE Setting

The type of ship such as cargo ships, tankers, HSC, etc. should be entered.
Note that the type of cargo (i.g. 71 : Cargo ships carrying DG, HS, or MP-A) should be
set in “CARGO TYPE & CREW” on the [NAV STATUS] menu. This data is
transmitted in the static data: MSG-5 reported every 6 minutes, and the receiver is able
to determine the ship’s type (included cargo type). See Table 3.2.1 on the next page.
Procedure
1. Press the [MENU] key, choose INITIAL SETTINGS, press the [ENT] key and enter
the password. Refer to Fig. 3.1.1.
[INITIAL SETTINGS]
SET MMSI
SET INT ANT POS.
SET EXT ANT POS.
SET SHIP TYPE
SET I/O PORT
3. Choose SET SHIP TYPE and press the [ENT] key.
[SET SHIP TYPE] No. Type No. Type

TYPE NO. : 1* 1* Future use 6* Passenger ship
2* WIG 7* Cargo ship
****** TYPE DETAIL ****** 3* Vessel 8* Tanker
FUTURE USE 4* High Speed Craft 9* Other type of ship
5* Special Craft
4. Using the Cursor-Pad, choose the type of ship and press the [ENT] key. In this part of
the section, the tens digit only is set.
Related setting:
In [CARGO TYPE & CREW] of the [NAV STATUS] menu, set cargo for each ship’s
of the units digit.
** i.g. 71 :Cargo ships carrying DG, HS, or MP-A **
[CARGO TYPE & CREW]

CREW 0000
TYPE NO 70
- - - -TYPE DETAIL- - - - -
CARGO SHIP
ALL SHIPS OF
THIS TYPE
3-4
Table 3.2.1 Type of ship table
Identifiers to be used by ship to report their type
Identifier No. Special craft

50 Pilot
51 SAR vessel
52 Tugs
53 Port tender
54 Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment
55 Law enforcement vessels
56 Spare-for assignment to local vessels
57 Spare-for assignment to local vessels
Medical trans ports
58
(as define in the 1949 Geneva Conventions and Additional Protocols)
59 Ship according to Resolution 18(mob-83)
First digit (*) Second digit (*) First digit (*) Second digit (*)
1-reserved for
0-All ships of this type 0-Fishing
future use
1-Carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO
2-WIG 1-Towing
hazard or pollutant category A
2-Towing and length of
3-see right 2-Carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO
3-Vessel the tow exceeds 200m or
column hazard or pollutant category B
breadth exceeds 25m
3-Carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO 3-Engaged in dredging or
4-HSC
hazard or pollutant category C underwater operations
4-Carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO 4-Engaged in diving
5-see above
hazard or pollutant category D operations
5-Engaged in military
5-reserved for future use
operations
6-Passenger
6-reserved for future use 6-Sailing
ships
7-Cargo ships 7-reserved for future use 7-Pleasure Craft
8-Tanker(s) 8-reserved for future use 8-reserved for future use
9-Other types
9-No additional information 9-reserved for future use
of ship
Note:
1. – DG; Dangerous Goods - HS; Harmful Substances - MP; Marine Pollutants
2. (*); The identifier should be constructed by selecting the appropriate first and
second digits.
For example, a general cargo ship not carrying dangerous goods, harmful
substances, or marine pollutants; would use identifier “7,” because the first
digit indicates the ship’s type.
Since the second digit indicates the attribute of the ship, a general cargo ship is
“0” of “0: All ships of this type.” Consequently, the code of a general cargo
ship is “70.”
3-5
3.3 I/O Port Settings

3.3.1 Arrangement of connection ports
COM6(SENSOR, AD-10) COM5(SENSOR)
LAN(Option)
COM4(SENSOR, EXT DISP)
COM3(EXT DISP,
MONI, Hi-Level)
COM2(EXT DISP,
MONI, Hi-Level)
図 3.6.1 FA-1501 ポートの配置
COM1(LR, EXT DISP)
PC(BEACON)
DISP(FA-1502)
EXT ALM
Fig. 3.3.1 Arrangement of connection ports
FA-1501 38.4kbps, Power ON/OFF

DISP FA-1502
8p RS-422/Max. 100m
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 1 Long Range EXT Display
RS-422/Max. 100m or
Long Range/ 8p
EXT Display
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 2 EXT Display or Monitor or Hi Level I/F
EXT Display 8p RS-422/Max. 100m
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 3 RS-422/Max. 100m EXT Display or Monitor or Hi Level I/F
EXT Display 8p
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 4 Sensor or EXT Display
Sensor RS-422/C.Loop/Max. 100m
10p
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 5 Sensor
Sensor
RS-422/C.Loop/Max. 100m
10p
IEC61162-1/2(4800/38.4kbps)
COM 6 Sensor or AD-10
Sensor/ RS-422/Max. 100mC.Loop
10p
AD-10
Contact
EXT ALM ALM System
5p Max. 100m
RS-232C(4800 - 57.6kbps)
PC PC or Beacon
9p-Dsub Max.15m
10BASE-T, 10BASE-T
LAN PC
(Option)
Fig. 3.3 2 FA-1501 connections
3-6
Table 3.3.1 Connected devices
Device Description
LONG Reserved for future service with INMARSAT C, HF equipment assumed.
RANGE INMARSAT C equipment is assumed.
To be connected to Radar, ECDIS, and Pilot plug to provide AIS data display and
EXT DISPLAY
carry out control.
MONITOR As the second display, FA-1502 is connected.
HI LEVEL IF To be connected to NAVNET 2 to provide AIS data display and carry out control.
Sensor inputted by IEC61162-1/2 or C.Loop.
SENSOR
GPS: Pos., SOG and COG data / GYRO: HDG data / ROT: $TI ROT data
AD-10 AD-100. Gyro signals are inputted in Furuno AD format.
PC Used for display or servicing.
BEACON Beacon receiver: GR-80
3.3.2 I/O sentence table of COM, PC port

The I/O sentences of the table below are shown in the sentence column of COM Port
Menu in the next page.
Table 3.3.2 Detail of I/O sentences
Sentence group Sentences

Long Range output 1 LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF
VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF,
AIS General output 2
LRI
AIS General input VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA,
3
Long Range input GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
Various kinds of PFEC, and
Control command-1
4 VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF,
(FA -> MONI)
LRI
Control command-2 Various kinds of PFEC, and
5
(MONI -> FA) VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACK
Various kinds of PFEC for NAVNET 2, and
Hi-Level output 6 VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF,
LRI
Hi-Level input 7 VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA,
GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
Service output 8 Control command-1 + various kinds of PFEC for R&D
Service input 9 Control command-2 + various kinds of PFEC for R&D
3-7
Note: Shaded settings indicate default values. Table 3.3.3 COM port menu
Port Setting Spec. I/O (Pin No.) Sentence
Output (#1-2) Control command-1 4
DISP RS-422
Input (#4-5) Control command-2 5
Output (#1-2) Long Range output 1
LONG RANGE
Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
MODE RS-422 Output (#1-2) AIS General output 2
EXT DISPLAY
COM 1 Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
DISABLE No I/O
IEC 61162-1
SPEED
IEC 61162-2
Output (#1-2) AIS General output 2
EXT DISPLAY
MONITOR
MODE RS-422 Input (#4-5) Control command-2 5
COM 2 Output (#1-2) Hi-Level output 6
HI LEVEL IF
Input (#4-5) Hi-Level input 7
DISABLE No I/O
IEC 61162-1
SPEED
IEC 61162-2
EXT DISPLAY
MONITOR
MODE RS-422 Input (#4-5) Control command-2 5
COM 3 Output (#1-2) Hi-Level output 6
HI LEVEL IF
Input (#4-5) Hi-Level input 7
DISABLE No I/O
IEC 61162-1
SPEED
IEC 61162-2
Output (#1-2) No output
RS-422
SENSOR Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
C.Loop Input (#9-10) AIS General input 3
MODE RS-422
EXT DISPLAY Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
COM4
RS-422 No I/O
DISABLE
C.Loop No I/O
IEC 61162-1
SPEED
IEC 61162-2
RS-422
MODE SENSOR Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
COM5 C.Loop Input (#9-10) AIS General input 3
IEC 61162-1
SPEED
IEC 61162-2
RS-422
MODE SENSOR Input (#4-5) AIS General input 3
COM6 IEC 61162-1
IEC 61162-2
SPEED
Input (#10-11) AD DATA
AD-10 C.Loop
Input (#12-13) AD CLK
3-8
Table 3.3.4 PC port menu
Port Setting Spec. I/O (Pin No.) Sentence

Output (#2) AIS General output 2
STANDARD
Input (#3) AIS General input 3
Output (#2) Control command-1 4
MONITOR
Input (#3) Control command-2 5
MODE RS-232C Output (#2) Service output 8
SERVICE
Input (#3) Service input 9
Output (#2) No output
PC BEACON
Input (#3) RTCM-SC-104
DISABLE No I/O
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
SPEED 19.2 KBPS
38.4 KBPS
57.6 KBPS
Note:
1. IEC 61162-1 data speed is 4,800 bps, and IEC 61162-2 is 38.4 kbps.
2. C. Loop and RS-422 for COM4 to COM6 can not be used at the same time.
You must choose C.Loop or RS-422.
3. Set the data output interval of Furuno AD format data within 1 second on the
AD-100 side.
4. MODE setting of the PC port means:
- STANDARD ; Same as EXT DISPLAY, handles the same commands.
- MONITOR ; Same as MONITOR of DISP, COM2, 3, handles the same
commands.
- SERVICE ; Same as MONITOR of DISP, COM2, 3, handles the same
commands. In addition, it is able to partly transmit the
debug code.
- BEACON ; Connects GR-80.
3-9
3.3.3 SET COM PORT Settings

This is to set the parameters of the ports that sensors, Radar, ECDIS, Pilot plug, etc. are
connected to.
Procedure
1. Press the [MENU] key, choose INITIAL SETTINGS, press the [ENT] key, and enter
the password. Refer to Fig. 3.1.1 of page 3-1.
[INITIAL SETTINGS]
SET MMSI
SET INT ANT POS.
SET EXT ANT POS.
SET SHIP TYPE
SET I/O PORT
3. Choose SET I/O PORT and press the [ENT] key.
[SET I/O PORT]

SET COM PORT
SET PC PORT
SET LAN PORT
SET PRIORITY
QUIT[MENU]
4. Choose SET COM PORT and set each COM port.
1. COM1 Setting
The connected devices type (MODE) and the communication speed (SPEED) that
connect to the COM1 port are set up.
LONG RANGE
[SET COM 1] EXT DISPLAY
MODE : LONG RANGE DISABLE
SPEED : IEC 61162-2
QUIT[MENU] IEC 61162-1

IEC 61162-2
3-10
Table 3.3.5 COM1 setting
MODE Devices SPEED Sentences

TD LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF
IEC
LONG VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR,
INMARSAT-C 61162-2
RANGE RD DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF,
(38.4 kbps)
LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT,
TD
RADAR, IEC LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
EXT
ECDIS, 61162-2 VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR,
DISPLAY
Pilot Plug (38.4 kbps) RD DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF,
TD No output
DISABLE
RD No input
Note: COM1 port Setting

1. Basically, sensors should be connected to COM4, 5, and 6.
However, since this port accepts Pos., SOG, COG, ROT and HDG sentences
irrespective of MODE setting, sensors can be connected to here. However, the
lowest priority is assigned for inputted data. See page 3-21, Setting of SET
PRIORITY.
2. The specifications of this port are compatible with RS-422. Then TD-A/B and
RD-A/B lines have the I/O circuits electrically separated by U2: LTC1535.
In addition, the jumper between #7 and #8 of COM1 is a termination resistor of
the TD data line. When more than one loads is connected to the TD-A/B line on
the transmission side, a termination resistor should be mounted on the receiver
side which has the electrically longest wiring. In the case of connecting FA-150
only, use a jumper to connect #7 and #8.
Terminator: YES(Jumper)
RD-A/B TD-A/B
FA-1501 GPS
RS-422
Terminator: NO(No Jumper)
RD-A/B TD-A/B
FA-1501 GPS
RS-422
Terminator: YES
RD-A/B RS-422
FAR-2xx7
Fig. 3.3.3 Termination resistor
3-11
T2 CR28
31160R BAT54C MOT p.c.b
(24P0036) COM1
J14
FIL 3 GND ISO
FIL 6 GND ISO

R4-6
5V 5V 330x3 Terminator
8 COM1 JP
Vcc ST1 ST2 Vcc2 7 COM1 JP
A
COM 3(1) RD RD FIL 5 COM1 RD B
B
RE N
RD2
DE U2 FIL 4 COM1 RD A
COM 3(1) TD LTC1535C
DI
Y
FIL 2 COM1 TD B
RS-422
Z
SI D N
FIL 1 COM1 TD A
GND GND2
Fig. 3.3.4 COM 1 port I/O
2. COM2 and COM3 port Settings

Both COM2 and COM3 ports have the same electrical specifications and settings.
EXT DISPLAY
[SET COM 2（３）]
MONITOR
MODE : EXT DISPLAY
HI LEVEL IF
SPEED : IEC 61162-2
DISABLE
QUIT[MENU]
IEC 61162-1
IEC 61162-2
Table 3.3.6 COM2 and COM3 Settings

VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT,
TD
RADAR, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
EXT
ECDIS, VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR,
DISPLAY
Pilot Plug RD DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF,
TD VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT,
MONITOR FA-1502 LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
IEC 61162-2
(38.4 kbps) RD
VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACK
LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
HI
NAVNET2 Various kinds of PFEC for NAVNET 2, and
LEVEL IF
VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR,
RD
DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF,
TD No output
DISABLE
RD No input
3-12
Note: COM2 and COM3 port Settings

They are same as those described in “Note: COM1 port setting” of Paragraphs 1 and
2.
T3(4) CR29(30)
31160R BAT54C MOT p.c.b COM2
(24P0036)
J15(16) COM3
FIL 3 GND ISO
FIL 6 GND ISO

R7 - 9(10 -12)
8 COM1 JP
COM 4(2) RD Vcc ST1 ST2 Vcc2 7 COM1 JP
A
(COM 5(3) RD) RD FIL 5 COM1 RD B
B
RE N
RD2
COM 4(2) TD U3(4) FIL 4 COM1 RD A
DE
(COM 5(3) TD) LTC1535C RS-422
DI
Y
FIL 2 COM1 TD B
Z
SI D N
FIL 1 COM1 TD A
GND GND2
( ):COM 3
Fig. 3.3.5 COM 2 (3) port I/O
3. COM4 and COM5 port Settings

These ports support RS-422 and C. Loop specifications.
COM4 COM5
[SET COM 4（5）] SENSOR SENSOR
MODE : SENSOR EXT DISPLAY
SPEED : IEC 61162-2 DISABLE
QUIT[MENU]
IEC 61162-1
IEC 61162-2
Note: COM4 and COM5 port settings

1. COM4 can be connected to EXT DISPLAY: Radar, ECDIS and Pilot plug. COM5
is a port dedicated to sensors.
The RD data line of COM4 and COM5 ports supports for both RS-422 and C.
LOOP specifications. Choose either one of them for data input. If data is inputted
from both ports, both inputted data collide.
Data collision !!
C.Loop port
Mixed data
RS-422 port OR
2. The specifications of this port are same as those described in “Note: COM1 port
setting” Paragraphs 2.
3-13
Table 3.3.7 COM4 and COM5 Settings
Port MODE Data Spec. Devices SPEED Sentences

TD: #1-#2 No output
VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK,
RD: #4-#5 RS-422 GPS, AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS,
SENSOR IEC
ROT, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT,
61162-1
RD: #9-#10 C.Loop GYRO VBW, VTG
VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR,

TD: #1-#2 RS-422
COM 4 RADAR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
EXT RD: #4-#5 RS-422 ECDIS, IEC VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK,
DISPLAY Pilot- 61162-2 AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS,
Plug HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT,
RD: #9-#10 C.Loop VBW, VTG
TD No output
DISABLE
RD No input
TD: #1-#2 RS-422 No output
RD: #4-#5 RS-422 VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK,
GPS,
COM 5 SENSOR IEC AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS,
ROT,
RD: #9-#10 C.Loop 61162-1 HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT,
GYRO
VBW, VTG
T5(6) CR31(32)
(24P0036)
J17(18) COM5
FIL 3 GND ISO
FIL 6 GND ISO

R13-15(16-18)
8 COM4(5) JP
COM 6(4) RD Vcc ST1 ST2 Vcc2 7 COM4(5) JP
A
(COM 7(5) RD) RD FIL 5 COM4(5) RD B
B
RE N
RD2
COM 6(4) TD DE U5(6) FIL 4 COM4(5) RD A
(COM 7(5) TD) LTC1535C
DI
Y RS-422
FIL 2 COM4(5) TD B
Z
SI D N
FIL 1 COM4(5) TD A
GND GND2
9 COM4-1(5-1)RD A
C.Loop
10 COM4-1(5-1)RD B
U9(10) FIL
SNR1(2) RD CR17(18)
( ): COM 5
FIL
Fig. 3.3.6 COM4 (5) port I/O
3-14
4. COM6 Setting
This is a port dedicated for sensors. An AD converter data: Furuno AD format data
should be connected to this port.
[SET COM 6]
MODE : SENSOR SENSOR
SPEED : IEC61162
QUIT[MENU] IEC 61162-1

IEC 61162-2
AD-10
Note: setting of COM6

1. The RD data line of COM6 port supports for both RS-422 and C. LOOP
specifications. Choose either one of them for data input. If data is inputted from
both ports, both inputted data collide.
C. Loop port shares one of sensor and AD converter data lines.
Note:
Input to AD data for C. Loop and RD of RS-422 cannot be used at the same
time.
Data collision !!
C.Loop port
Mixed data
RS-422 port OR
2. The specifications of this port are same as those described in “Note: setting of
COM1” Paragraphs 2.
Table 3.3.8 COM6 setting
Port MODE Data Spec. Devices SPEED Sentences

TD: #1-#2 RS-422 No output
RD: #4-#5 RS-422 VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK,
GPS,
IEC AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS,
ROT,
RD: #9-#11 C.Loop 61162-1 HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT,
GYRO
COM 6 SENSOR VBW, VTG
AD DATA
RD: #10-#11
C.Loop AD-100 AD-10 FURUNO AD Format
AD CLK
RD: #12-#13
3-15
T7 CR33
(24P0036)
J19
FIL 3 GND ISO
FIL 6 GND ISO

R19-21
8 COM6 JP
A
B
RE N
RD2
U7 FIL 4 COM6 RD A
DE
COM 8(6) TD DI
LTC1535C
Y
FIL 2 COM6 TD B
Z RS-422
SI D N
FIL 1 COM6 TD A
GND GND2
9 COM6-1 RD A
C.Loop
10 AD DATA H IEC: #9 - #11
11 COM6-1 RD B/AD DATA C
CR21 12 AD CLK H C.Loop
U14 FIL
AD-10: #10- #11(Data)
13 AD CLK C
SNR3 AD DATA RD #12 -#13(CLK)
FIL
CR22
U15 FIL
AD CLK RD
FIL
Fig. 3.3.7 COM6 port I/O
3.3.4 SET PC PORT Setting

This port supports RS-232C specifications.
Procedure
[SET I/O PORT]

SET COM PORT
SET PC PORT
SET LAN PORT
SET PRIORITY
QUIT[MENU]
3-16
4. Choose SET PC PORT and set MODE and SPEED.
4800 BPS [SET PC PORT] STANDARD

9600 BPS MONITOR
MODE : STANDARD
19.2 KBPS SERVICE
SPEED : 38.4KBPS
38.4 KBPS BEACON
57.6 KBPS DISABLE
QUIT[MENU]
Table 3.3.9 PC PORT setting

VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2,
TD
LR3, LRF, LRI
IEC 61162-2
STANDARD PC VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM,
(38.4 kbps)
RD GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD,
RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
TD VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT, LR1,
IEC 61162-2
MONITOR PC LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
(38.4 kbps)
RD
Above-mentioned MONITOR TD Sentence +
TD
Various kinds of PFEC for R&D
SERVICE PC
Above-mentioned MONITOR RD Sentence +
RD
Various kinds of PFEC for R&D
TD No output
BEACON GR-80 4800
RD RTCM-SC-104
TD No output
DISABLE
RD No input
Note:
MODE setting means the following:
- STANDARD ; Sentence same as EXT DISPLAY
- MONITOR ; To be set when PC-version AIS display is connected.
PC-version AIS display software is FAISPC MARK2 (optional).
- SERVICE ; To be used for R&D.
- BEACON ; GR-80 is connected.
3-17
PC RS-232C
MAIN p.c.b J15
(24P0035)
1 NC
PC RD
FIL 2 PC SD
U29 3 PC RD
(DS14C232M) DTR
4
PC TD
FIL 5 0V
6 DSR
RS-232C
Convertor 7 RTC
8 CTS
9 NC
Fig. 3.3.8 PC port I/O
3.3.5 SET LAN PORT Setting

When LAN port is used, mount the NET-100 board (03P9332) to the MAIN board as
shown in the photo. The NET-100 board is optional.
The specifications of this port are automatically changed over to 100BASE-T or
10BASE-T in accordance with the PC specifications.
The protocol is UDP (User Data-gram Protocol).
NET-100 board
(03P9332)
Fig. 3.3.9 Equipment of LAN board
3-18
Procedure
[SET I/O PORT]

SET COM PORT
SET PC PORT
SET LAN PORT
SET PRIORITY
QUIT[MENU]
4. Choose SET LAN PORT set MODE, IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and PORT
NO.
[SET LAN PORT] STANDARD

MODE : DISABLE MONITOR
IP ADDRESS SERVICE
172.031.024.001 DISABLE
SUB NET MASK
255.255.000.000
PORT NO. : 10000
Table 3.3.10 LAN PORT setting

VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ALR, TXT, LR1,
TD
LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
STANDARD PC VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR,
RD DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI,
100 BASE-T
OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
10 BASE-T
(Automatically
MONITOR PC LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
changed over
in accordance RD
with PC)
Above-mentioned MONITOR TD Sentence +
TD
PFEC for R&D
SERVICE PC
Above-mentioned MONITOR RD Sentence +
RD
PFEC for R&D
TD No output
DISABLE
RD No input
3-19
Note:
MODE setting means the following:
- STANDARD ; Sentence same as EXT DISPLAY. COM1 port is substituted for
LAN.
- MONITOR ; To be set when PC-version AIS display is connected. PC-version
AIS display software is FAISPC MARK2 (optional).
- SERVICE ; To be used for R&D.
3-20
3.3.6 SET PRIORITY Setting

This is the setting which data of the port should be preferentially used when the same
sentence is inputted into COM4, COM5 and COM6. The highest priority is given to 1
which is followed by 2 and 3, in that order. The timeout of priority is 5 seconds. In 5
seconds after the data is unable to be received, the port is changed over to the port with
the next priority.
Note:
COM1 through COM3 are given the lowest priority and are same level. Also, they do
not have timeout function. When any data is inputted, its data accept. For example, the
sensor data of the same sentence is entered in COM1 and COM2. “Data is
spontaneously changed over” will occurs.
[PRIORITY] [xxxxx]
L/L, COG, SOG COM4: 1 1
HDG COM5: 2 2
ROT COM6: 3 3
QUIT[MENU] QUIT[MENU
Priority
Procedure
[SET I/O PORT]

SET COM PORT
SET PC PORT
SET PRIORITY
QUIT[MENU]
4. Choose SET PRIORITY and set priority of COM4, 5, and COM6.
Item Settings
COM 4: 1, 2, 3
L/L, COG, SOG COM 5: 1, 2, 3
COM 6: 1, 2, 3
PRIORITY
HDG COM 4: 1, 2, 3
// COM 5: 1, 2, 3
ROT COM 6: 1, 2, 3
3-21
3.4 EXT ALM Output Setting
3.4 EXT ALM Output Setting

ALARM MODE -> KEY STOP
In the default setting of ALARM MODE, the alarm message is outputted in pop-up
display and EXT ALM signal when alarm is detected. Relay contact is also activated.
Those alarms can be stopped / acknowledged by pressing any key of FA-1502. This
will turn ON the External ALM ACK signal. EXT ALM output continues until the
alarm event is removed.
ALARM MODE -> CONTINUOUS
To change the above alarm output form to the one in which the EXT ALM output is
continued until the alarm event is removed as illustrated below, the following setting
should be carried out.
Press any key or

ALM ACK
+5V EXT ALM
2
K1
G5V_1_5V 1 1. ALM A
Normal Open
ALM Sound
5, 6 3. ALM C
9
ALM 10 2. ALM B Power OFF
Q1, 2 Normal Close
4. ACK H
U11 +5V
TLP181_GR_TLP 5. ACK C Powerr ON
ALM ACK Power OFF
EXT ALM
#1 - #3 (Normal Open)
ALM ON ALM OFF
MOT ALM Occured ALM Deleted
(24P0036)
Fig. 3.4.1 Alarm output
Procedure
1. Choose ALARM MODE from [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS -> FOR SERVICE ->
OTHER menu.
2. Set ALARM MODE.

- CONTINUOUS : EXT ALM output continues until the alarm event is
removed. However, the alarm sound only can be stopped
when ALM ACK signal is turned ON or pressing any key
of FA-1502.
- KEY STOP : Alarm sound and EXT ALM output are turned OFF when
(Default setting) ALM ACK signal is turned ON, pressing any key of
FA-1502 or alarm event is removed.
3-22
3.5 CH MODE Setting
3.5 CH MODE Setting

This is a setting that controls whether the FA-150 utilizes USA channel mode or on the
INT (international) channel mode during Regional operation. This channel designation
(control) in the Region operation setting is effective only by setting from DSC message
or AIS message (MSG.22) from shore-based AIS.
Procedures
1. Choose CH MODE from [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS -> FOR SERVICE -> OTHER
menu.
2. Set CH MODE.
- INT : To conform to INT (international) channel.
- USA : Of the INT channel list, CH1002, 1004, 1060 and 1062 are unable to
be used. In addition, CH1067, 2067, 1013 and 2013 become forcibly
1 W-operated. If any of the above channels is designated by
shore-based AIS in USA channel mode, the designated channel is
ignored.
3-23
3.6 Regional operating channels Setting

You may display the status of regional operating areas currently retained in the
equipment memory. Nine of any combination of AIS message from shore-based AIS,
DSC message, manual settings and commands from ECDIS or a PC may be registered
and one will be HIGH SEA.
Setting is carried out on the [MENU] -> CHANNEL SETTINGS -> EDIT CHANNEL.
1. About registering areas

1) Data registered from AIS and DSC messages registered within last two hours
cannot be edited.
2) If the registered items, those labeled [HIGH SEA] cannot be edited ([HIGH
SEA] are data used for international waters not controlled by shore-based AIS).
3) If two areas overlap one another the older data is deleted.
4) Data older than five weeks is deleted.
5) Area data is deleted when it is more than 500 miles from the area for which it
was registered.
2. EDIT CHANNEL
[EDIT CHANNEL]
SELECT NO. : 0
TIME
__/________:____:____
FROM
MMSI: _________
TYPE: MANUAL
QUIT [MENU] EDIT [ENT]
- SELECT NO. : File number covers 0 to 9

No. 0; For manual EDIT CHANNEL setting
No. 1; Current Region operation information appears
No. 2; Next candidate Region operation
No. 3 and after; Appears closest to the own ship in order
- TIME : Date and time of the registered data is displayed.
- MMSI : When controlled by DSC or shore-based AIS, its MMSI No. is
displayed.
- TYPE : The controlled method is displayed.
1) HIGH SEA (in the case of default setting)
2) AIS (when controlled by AIS message)
3) PI (when controlled by ACA sentence from PC or ECDIS)
4) DSC (when controlled by DSC)
5) MANUAL (when entered manually using PFEC sentence
from MKD or PC-MDK)
3-24
3. Setting of registering areas by manual.
[EDIT CHANNEL] [EDIT CHANNEL] 1/2 [EDIT CHANNEL] 2/2

SELECT NO. 0 FROM MMSI:________ CH-AREA
TIME: POWER:12.5W RIGHT-TOP
___/____:__:___ [ENT] CH-NO.: CH-A: 2087 ▲ LAT: 00°00.0’ N
FROM CH-B: 2088 LON: 000°00.0’ E
MMSI: ________ MODE: CH-A: TX/RX LEFT-BOTTOM
TYPE: MANUAL CH-B: TX/RX ▼ LAT: 00°00.0’ N
QUIT [MENU ] EDIT [ENT] ZONE: 5nm LON: 000°00.0’ E
- POWER : Registered output power is displayed. In addition, output power can

be selected 2 or 12.5 W.
- CH-NO. : Registered channels are displayed. In addition, channels can be edited.
- MODE : Registered modes are displayed. In addition, modes can be edited.
CH-A TX/RX TX/RX RX RX RX UNUSE

CH-B TX/RX RX TX/RX RX UNUSE RX
- ZONE : Registered ZONE (channel transitional zone) is displayed. In addition,

ZONE can be edited. Settings are made in the range from 1 to 8 nm.
ZONE is the inside of the

Region
Zone: 1 - 8nm
designated Region.
- CH-AREA : Registered Region is displayed. In addition, the Regional areas can edit.
For setting, two geographic coordinates are designated. The range is 20
to 200 nm. The available range is 20 to 200 nm. If the area contains
overlapping data the older data will be erased.
20 - 200nm
RIGHT-
TOP
LEFT-
BOTTOM
OK Region 3 Region 1 NG Region 3 Region 1
Region 4 Region 2 Region 4 Region 2
3-25
Reference: Transitional Mode Operations

The AIS automatically switches to the two-channel transitional operating mode when it
is located within five nautical miles of a regional boundary. In this mode the AIS
transmits and receives on the primary AIS frequency specified for the occupied region
and also transmits and receives on the primary AIS frequency of the nearest adjacent
region.
Region-2 Region-1 Hi sea
1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Zone-2 Zone-1 Region operation begins 5 nm
before the ship enters the
Region from High-sea.
The channel transition takes place as follows when the channel is operated as described
in the table below.
AIS CH-1 AIS CH-2 AIS Channel

(Primary CH) (Secondary CH) Region
Region-1 CH A-1 CH B-1 Primary Secondary
Region-2 CH A-2 CH B-2 CH CH
High-sea AIS-1 (CH2087) AIS-2 (CH2088) 1 AIS-1 AIS-2
2 AIS-1 CH A-1
3 CH A-1 AIS-1
4 CH A-1 CH B-1
5 CH A-1 CH A-2
6 CH A-2 CH A-1
7 CH A-2 CH B-2
8 CH A-2 AIS-1
9 AIS-1 CH A-2
1 AIS-1 AIS-2
When the AIS is entering the transitional mode, it continues to utilize the current
channels for transmitting for a full one-minute frame while switching one of the
receivers to the new channel. The TDMA access rules is applied to vacating slots on the
current channel and accessing slots on the new channel. This transitional behavior is
made only when the channels are changing.
3-26
3.7 USER SETTINGS
3.7 USER SETTINGS

On [MENU] -> USER SETTINGS, the following settings are carried out.
Table 3.7.1 USER SETTINGS Menu
Item Setting Description

ON/OFF setting of beep sound when panel keys are
KEY BEEP ON/OFF
operated.
ON/OFF setting of beep sound when alarm is initiated.
ALARM
ON/OFF To stop buzzer, pressing any keys or turn ON ALM ACK
BUZZER
signal.
ALL:
Controls display of incoming call notice popup
(MESSAGE!) irrespective of kind of messages.
ABM:
Controls display of incoming call notice popup
(MESSAGE!) when Safety, Binary messages to the own
DISP ship are received.
RCVD ALL/ABM/OFF OFF:
MSG Incoming call notice popup (MESSAGE!) of all the
received messages are not displayed.
Note:
In any of all the above settings, the received
messages are stored in [MENU] -> MSG
-> RX LOG.
Controls whether or not the buzzer is sounded when a
message is received.
RCVD
ON/OFF Note:
MSG BUZZ
Setting of incoming call notice popup (MESSAGE!)
display is the setting of the above DISP RCVD MSG.
Setting whether the request from “Long Range” is returned
LR MODE AUTO/MANUAL
automatically or manually.
CPA limit is set. The target that comes within this setting is
CPA: 6.00 nm
considered a Dangerous Target. CPA set in this section is
(0 – 6 nm)
not related to the radar side.
TCPA is set. The target that comes within this setting is
TCPA: 60 min
considered a Dangerous Target.
CPA/TCPA (0 – 60 min)
TCPA set in this section is not related to the radar side.
ALAM
ALARM MODE: Controls whether or not popup (COLLISION ALARM) is
ON/OFF displayed when Dangerous Target is detected.
ALARM
ON/OFF setting of the alarm sound when Dangerous
BUZZER:
Target is detected.
ON/OFF
3-27
3.8 Connecting a Second FA-1502 Connecting
3.8 Connecting a Second FA-1502 Connecting

A second FA-1502 can be connected to COM2 or COM3 port. The same operation is
applied to both the first and the second units and there is no priority to operation.
[MENU] -> USER SETTINGS can be independently set, respectively. However, setting
of LONG RANGE should be excluded.
1. Connection
Connect the first FA-1502 to [DISP] port and the second FA-1502 to COM-2 or COM-3
port. Connect power supply control line: SW-H, C of the second FA-1502 in parallel
with power supply control line: DISP SW+(#7), DISP SW-(#8) of DISP port of the first
FA-1502.
FA-1501 No.1 FA-1502
DISP COM
DISP TD A 1 1 TX A
DISP TD B 2 2 TX B
GND ISO 3 3 RX A Power
DISP RD A 4 4 RX B
DISP RD B 5 5 SW H 1 DC IN +
GND ISO 6 6 SW L 2 DC IN -
DISP SW(+) 7 7 0V 3 FG
DISP SW(-) 8 8 0V
9 NC
10 FG
No.2 FA-1502
COM2 or COM3
EX. COM2 COM
COM2 TD A 1 1 TX A
COM2 TD B 2 2 TX B
Power
GND ISO 3 3 RX A
COM2 RD A 4 4 RX B
COM2 RD B 5 5 SW H 1 DC IN +
GND ISO 6 6 SW L 2 DC IN -
COM2 JP 7 7 0V 3 FG
COM2 JP 8 8 0V
9 NC
10 FG
Fig. 3.8.1 Connection of No. 2 FA-1502
2. Setting
Set MODE of connection port: COM2 or COM3 to “MONITOR” and Speed to “38.4
kbps.”
3-28
3.9 PR-240 input voltage modification
3.9 PR-240 input voltage modification

PR-240 is shipped for 220 VAC power input. Changing between 230 VAC and 115 VAC
is made as shown below. No soldering is required.
Change tap connection.

Change jumper connection
Step 1. Changing tap connection
White
Black
1
2
3
4
White Black
1
100VAC spec.
2
3
220VAC spec.
4
(default）
The white wire is connected to #1 and

the black #2 in 220 VAC sets. Both
white and black wire are connected to
#1 in 115 VAC sets.
Step 2. Changing jumper connection
Red
SEL
115V
SEL
230V
Change the connection of red wire

depending on ship’s mains.
3-29
Chapter 4. Menu
4.2 [NAVTree
STATUS]
4.1 [DISP]
Each time the [DISP] key is pressed, the display changes in the sequence shown below.
In the “TARGET LIST” screen, choose the target and then press the [ENT] key, so, you
can view the detailed target data.
[DISP]
PLOTTER DISPLAY
[ FURUNO ]
HDG :111
SOG :; 10.0 kt
COG : 111.0
CPA 6.19 nm
TCPA : 12’50’’
INTRD : 1
RNG : 6.0 nm DETAIL : [ENT]
[DISP] Up to 2,048 AIS targets

TARGET LIST may be shown.
[TARGET LIST] [DANGEROUS LIST]

NAME RNG (nm) BRG( ) NAME CPA (nm) TCPA
FURUNO 2.9 275.1 FURUNO 2.9 275.1
VOYAGER 3.1 298.0 VOYAGER 3.1 298.0
1/2 DTL[ENT] DNG[ >] 1/2 DTL[ENT] DNG[ >]
[DISP]
OWN SHIP’S STATIC DATA
[OWN STATIC DATA] 1/5 [OWN STATIC DATA] 2/5 [OWN STATIC DATA] 3/5 [OWN STATIC DATA] 4/5 [OWN STATIC DATA] 5/5
CPA : 6.00 nm CREW : 20
NAME : FURUNO DESTINATION : KOBE DRAUGHT : 0.0 m
TCPA : 60 min TYPE OF SHIP : 70
NAV STATUS : 15 ANT POS INT EXT CLASS : A
CALL SIGN : JAXXX *** STATUS DETAIL *** LENGTH A : 100m 100m *** TYPE DETAIL ***
MMSI : 432456789 DATE : 12/APR NOT DEFINED LENGTH B : 20m 20m TANKER
IMO No. : 001234567 TIME : 10:10 (DEFAULT) LENGTH C : 10m 15m ALL SHIPS OF
LENGTH D : 15m 10m THIS TYPE
[DISP]
OWN SHIP’S DYNAMIC DATA
[OWN DIYNAMIC DATA]

22/JUN/2005 06:43:20
LAT : 34 27.8412’N
LON : 135 25.1232’E
COG : 57.0 HDG : 123
ROT : R10.0 /min
PA : H RAIM : USE
[DISP]
[ALARM STATUS]
HDG 22 / JUN 05:11:11
ROR 22 / JUN 05:11:12
[DISP]
Fig. 4.1.1 [DISP] screen sequence

4-1
4.2 [NAV STATUS]
4.2 [NAV STATUS]

There are five items on the NAV STATUS menu that you will need to enter at the start
of a voyage: [NAV STATUS] (navigation status), [DESTINATION ], [ARRIVAL
TIME] (arrival date and time), [CARGO TYPE & CREW] (number of crew and vessel
type) and [DRAUGHT].
This information should be updated as required.
[NAV STATUS]
NAV STATUS : 15
[ENT]
Input NAV STATUS
*** STATUS DETAIL ***
NOT DEFINED
(DEFAULT)
[DESTINATION] [DESTINATION] [DESTINATION]

KOBE
*************************** ( 1 / 3 ) *************************** ( 0 / 0 ) ENTER A NEW
[NEW ?] e.g [NEW ?] NEW [ENT] DESTINATION
KOBE SELECT KOBE [ENT] KOBE Input DESTINATION
OSAKA EDIT OSAKA
DELETE
QUIT : [NAV STATUS]
- SELECT:
to choose the appropriate
[ARRIVAL TIME] [DESTINATION]
Destination,
DATE : -- / ---
- EDIT: DATE : -- / --- NEW [ENT] TIME : -- : --
to edit the selected Destination, TIME : -- : -- Input DATE and TIME
- DELETE:
to delete the selected Destination.
TYPE NO: [CARGO TYPE & CREW] [CARGO TYPE & CREW]
Only the second digit of the CREW : 20 CREW : 20
TYPE NO : 80 TYPE NO : 80
vessel class may be *** TYPE DETAIL ***
[ENT]
*** TYPE DETAIL ***
TANKER Input CREW & TYPE NO TANKER
entered here. The first digit ALL SHIP OF ALL SHIP OF
is entered on the INITIAL THIS TYPE THIS TYPE
SETTINGS menu during

installation.
[DRAUGHT] [DRAUGHT]
DRAUGHT : 0.0 m DRAUGHT : 10.0 m
[ENT]
Input DRAUGHT
Fig. 4.2.1 [NAV STATUS] screen sequence
4-2
4.3 [MENU]
4.3 [MENU]
[MENU] Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-2 Menu-3
ADDRESS TYPE: BROAD CAST/ADRS CAST
Note:
SET MSG TYPE MMSI:********
When selected ADRS CAST
MSG TYPE: SAFETY/ NORMAL
CHANNEL ALTERNATE/BOTH A & B/A/B
Note:
CREATE MSG - ADRS CAST
[SET MSG] SAFETY : 156 character
SET MSG e.g: Normal : 151 character
DE FURUNO ------- - BROAD CAST
SAFETY : 161 character
MSG Normal : 156 character
ARE YOU SURE?
SEND MSG SEND MESSAGE.
YES/NO
[TX LOG]
Date/Time/OK or FAIL/TO/MSG.
TX LOG
e.g. select Tx log form list Sent Message appears
(Max. 20)
24/APR 14:11 FAIL
TO: 432000011 S-ABM
[RX LOG]
Date/Time/OK or FAIL/TO/MSG.
RX LOG
e.g: select Tx log form list Received Message appears
(Max. 20)
24/APR 14:11 FAIL
TO: 432000011 S-ABM
[SENSOR STATUS]
e.g:
SENSOR EXTRL DGNSS
STATUS EXTRL SOG/COG
HDT VALID
OTHER ROT
4-3
4.3 [MENU]
[INTERNAL GPS]
LAT: xx°xx. xxxx’x
LON: xxx°xx. xxxx’x
SOG: 0.0 - 999.9 kt)
COG: 0.0 - 359.0°)
UTC: dd:mmm:yyyy
INTERNAL hh:mm:ss
GPS GPS STS: DGPS/
NO FIX/
2D/3D/D2D/
D3D/DOP/
NO FIX
PA: H/L
RAIM: USED/UNUSED
KEY BEEP ON/OFF
ALARM BUZZER ON/OFF
DISP RCVD MSG ALL/ABM/OFF
RCVD MSG BUZZ ON/OFF
USER
LR MODE AUTO/MANUAL
SETTINGS
CPA 6.00 nm (0 – 6 nm)
TCPA 60 min (0 – 60 min)
CPA/TCPA ALAM
ALARM MODE ON/OFF
ALARM BUZZER ON/OFF
MMSI: X1 ---- X9
INITIAL IMO NO: X1 ---- X9
VIEW MMSI
SETTINGS NAME: Max. 20 character
C.SIN: Max. 7 character
Password: A (0-511 m) /B (0-511 m)
VIEW INT ANT POS.
ENT->ENT C (0-63 m) /D (0-63 m)
A (0-511m) /B (0-511 m)
VIEW EXT ANT POS.
Cont’d C (0-63 m) /D (0-63 m)
VIEW SHIP TYPE TYPE NO: x*
4-4
4.3 [MENU]
[VIEW COM1]
MODE: LONG RANGE
SPEED: IEC61162-2
[VIEW COM2]
MODE: EXT DISPLAY
SPEED: IEC61162-2
[VIEW COM3]
MODE: MONITOR
SPEED: IEC61162-2
VIEW COM PORT
[VIEW COM4]
MODE: SENSOR
SPEED: IEC61162-1
[VIEW COM5]
MODE: SENSOR
SPEED: IEC61162-1
INITIAL [VIEW COM6]
VIEW I/O PORT
SETTINGS MODE: SENSOR
SPEED: IEC61162-1
[VIEW PC PORT]
VIEW PC PORT MODE: MONITOR
SPEED: 38.4KBPS
[VIEW LAN PORT]
MODE: DISABLE
VIEW LAN PORT IP ADDRESS: 172.031.024.001
SUB NET MASK: 255.255.000.000
PORT NO.: 10000
[VIEW PRIORITY]
COM4: 1 / COM5: 2 / COM6: 3
L/L, COG, SOG
[VIEW PRIORITY]
VIEW PRIORITY COM4: 2 / COM5: 3 / COM6: 1
HDG
[VIEW PRIORITY]
COM4: 2 / COM5: 3 / COM6: 1
ROT
4-5
4.3 [MENU]
MMSI: X1 ---- X9
IMO NO: X1 ---- X9
SET MMSI
NAME: Max. 20 character
C.SIN: Max. 7 character
A(0-511 m) / B(0-511 m)
SET INT ANT POS.
C(0-63 m) / D(0-63 m)
A (0-511 m) / B(0-511 m)
SET EXT ANT POS.
C(0-63 m) / D(0-63 m)
SET SHIP TYPE 0* NOT AVAILABLE
MODE:
[SET COM1] LONG RANGE/EXT DISPLAY/
MODE: DISABLE
SPEED: SPEED:
INITIAL IEC61162-1/IEC61162-2
SETTINGS MODE:
[SET COM2] EXT DISPLAY/MONITOR
Enter MODE: HI LEVEL IF/DISABLE
Password: SPEED: SPEED:
xxxxxx IEC61162-1/IEC61162-2
MODE:
Cont’d SET I/O PORT SET COM PORT [SET COM3] EXT DISPLAY/MONITOR
MODE: HI LEVEL IF/DISABLE
Cont’d Cont’d SPEED: SPEED:
IEC61162-1/IEC61162-2
MODE:
[SET COM4] SENSOR/EXT DISPLAY
MODE: DISABLE
SPEED: SPEED:
IEC61162-1/EC61162-2
MODE:
[SET COM5] SENSOR
MODE: SPEED:
SPEED: IEC61162-1
IEC61162-2
4-6
4.3 [MENU]
MODE:
[SET COM6] SENSOR
SET COM PORT MODE:
SPEED: SPEED:
IEC61162-1/IEC61162-2
MODE:
STANDERD/MONITOR/SERVICE/
[SET PC PORT]
BEACON/DISABLE
SET PC PORT MODE:
SPEED:
SPEED:
4800/9600/19.2KBPS/38.4KBPS/
57.6KBPS
MODE
[SET LAN PORT]
INITIAL STANDERD/MONITOR/SERVICE/
SET I/O PORT MODE
SETTINGS DISABLE
SET LAN PORT IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS: 172.031.024.001
SUB NET MASK
SUB NET MASK: 255.255.000.000
PORT NO.
PORT NO. : 10000
L/L, COG, SOG
[SET PRIORITY]
COM4: 1, 2, 3 / COM5: 1, 2, 3
L/L, COG, SOG
COM6: 1, 2, 3
HDG
[SET PRIORITY]
SET PRIORITY COM4: 1, 2, 3 / COM5: 1, 2, 3
HDG
COM6: 1, 2, 3
ROT
[SET PRIORITY]
COM4: 1, 2, 3 / COM5: 1, 2, 3
ROT
COM6: 1, 2, 3
4-7
4.3 [MENU]
[VIEW CHANNEL]
POWER : 1 W/2 W/12.5 W
VIEW CHANNEL CHANNEL NO. :
CH-A: 2087
CH-B: 2088
[CHANNEL EDIT] 1/2
[CHANNEL EDIT] FROM MMSI: --------------
SELECT NO. (0) POWER: 2 W/12.5 W
TIME CH NO. CH-A: 2087
dd/mmm hh:mm CH-B: 2088
CHANNEL FROM MODE CH-A: TX/RX, RX, UNUSED
SETTINGS MMSI: --------- CH-B: TX/RX, RX, UNUSED
TYPE: HIGH SEA/AIS/PI/ ZONE: 5 nm (1-8 nm)
EDIT CHANNEL DSC/MANUAL
[CHANNEL EDIT] 2/2
CH AREA
RIGHT TOP
Note: LAT: 0°00.0’N/S
No.0: For Edit Channel LON: 0°00.0’E/W
No.1: Current Channel LEFT BOTTOM
No.2 – 9: Edited Channel LAT: 0°00.0’N/S
LON: 0°00.0’E/W
4-8
4.3 [MENU]
[MONITOR TEST]
BOOT NO. : 2450020-01.02
PROG NO. : 2450021-01.0x
MONITOR TEST
ROM : OK CONT : xx
SDRAM : OK DIM : x
PORT : OK KEY :
[MEMORY TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
[TRANSPONDER TEST] 2450018-01.0x
MEMORY TEST MAIN ROM : OK/NG
MAIN RAM : OK/NG
TRANSPONDER TEST SUB RAM : OK/NG
[GPS TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
DIA-
GPS TEST 4850264005
GNOSTICS
TEST : OK/NG
(NG List)
Cont’d
[PWR ON/OFF HISTORY]
PWR-ON dd/mm/yyyy
PWR ON/OFF HISTORY Time
PWR-OFF dd/mm/yyyy
Time
[TX ON/OFF HISTORY]
TX-ON dd/mm/yyyy
TX ON/OFF HISTORY Time
TX-OFF dd/mm/yyyy
Time
[MEMORY CLEAR]
MONITOR CLEAR ARE YOU SURE?
MEMORY CLEAR
SET USER DEFAULT YES NO
GPS COLD START
4-9
4.3 [MENU]
[CH & PWR SETTINGS]

POWER : 0 W/1 W/2 W/12.5 W
CH NO. CH-A : xxxx
CH & PWR SETTINGS CH-B : xxxx
MODE : CH-A : TX/RX//RX//UNUSED
CH-B :: TX/RX//RX//UNUSED
CH SET : AUTO/MANUAL
[TX TEST]
PATTERN: PN_PATTERN/TYPE 1/
TYPE 2/DSC 1[Y]/DSC 2[B]/
FOR SERVICE TX TEST DSC 3[BY]/TXF
Password: TX START [DIM]
Up key -> Down key TX STOP [MENU]
->Left key -> Right key
DIA- [RX TEST]
-> NAV -> DIM -> DISP
GNOSTICS RX1 : OK/NG
-> ENT -> MENU RX TEST
RX2 : OK/NG
-> NAV
DSC : OK/NG
[IEC PORT TEST]
COM1: OK/NG/COM2: OK/NG
Cont’d
IEC PORT TEST COM3: OK/NG/COM4: OK/NG
COM5: OK/NG/COM6: OK/NG
PC: OK/NG
I/O PORT TEST
[NMEA PORT TEST]
NMEA PORT TEST COM4: OK/NG/COM5: OK/NG
COM6: OK/NG
[AD-10 PORT TEST]
AD-10 PORT TEST
AD10 : OK/NG
[ALARM HISTORY] e.g:
ALARM HISTORY
“ALARM LIST” MKD 22/JUN 01:49:10
4-10
4.3 [MENU]
[xxx MONITOR]
COM1/ COM 2 COM 3 COM 4/COM 5/
I/O MONITOR e.g:
COM6/PC/GPS
$PFEC,AI---------------
SIM MODE OFF/1/2
ALARM MODE CONTINUOUS/KEY STOP
CH MODE INT/USA
ARE YOU SURE?
ALL CLEAR
YES NO
[CPU VERSION]
2450018-01.0x
MAIN: 01.01.B1
200507061623
DIA-
FOR SERVICE SUB : 01.01
GNOSTICS
200504151523
OTHER
FPGA : 01.0F
DEBUG MENU 000000000000
[A/D MONITOR]
VF : xxx / VR : xx / REF : xxx
[SS/SN MONITOR]
RX1_SS : xx / RX2_SS : xx
DSC_SS : xx
RX1_SN : xx / RX2_SN : xx
DSC_SN : xx
SILENT MENUNOTE ON/OFF
CHECK SUMNOTE CHECK/UNCHECK
NOTE:
- Call up the SILENT MENU and CHECK SUM;
1. Turn ON Power while press [MENU] and [ENT] key, then input the Password. (See page 4-10, 8-19)
2. Call up; FOR SERVICE -> OTHER -> SILENT MENU: ON
- How to call up the “SELECT MODE”;

Press [DIM] key, until “SELECT MODE” appears
4-11
Chapter 5. Block Description
5.1 Overall Block Diagram

5.1.1 Overall block diagram
FA-150 consists of FA-1501 Transponder unit, FA-1502 Monitor unit and VHF/GPS
Antennas.
LAN
NET-100 (100BASE-T, 10BASE-T)
FA-1501 (03P9332)
GPS ANT GPS

PC
GPS TB J15
(24P0043) (GN-8093) MAIN 9p D-sub RS-232C
TNC
Tx 45MHz
J3 (24P0035)
J10 J4 J6 DGPS BCON RCV

VHF ANT ANT J2 J4 5V (GR-80)
13.6V-2
TX
M J1 (24P0032) 13.6V-1 J20 J4 J1
RX2 19.2MHz
RX1 19.2MHz
J3 J2 DSC 19.2MHz
TX UNLOCK Power SW
RX RF
MONI J21
R VSWR
PTT1 FA-1502
PTT2
PWR REF FURUNO UNIVERSAL AIS
CLK PLL
J2 DATA PLL RS-422 (38.4kbps)
TX ST DISP Power ON/OFF
MENU ENT
J4 DSC J1 J7 DISP
NAV
DIM
J9(8p)
STATUS
13.6V-2 FA-150 POW
DSC 19.2MHz
J3 (24P0034) DSC 36kHz
IEC61162-1/2
COM 1 (4800/38.4kbps) Long Range
J14(8p) or
RX1 RF
RX2 RF
EXT Display
13.6V-2
Rx1 19.2MHz
J1 J2 J5 Rx1 UNLOCK IEC61162-1/2 EXT Display,
RX1 RX1 MUTE COM 2 (4800/38.4kbps)
CLK PLL
(24P0033A) DATA PLL J15(8p) MONITOR,
RX1 ST
RX1 36kHz or HI LEVEL I/F
13.6V-2
Rx2 19.2MHz IEC61162-1/2 EXT Display,
J1 J2 J3 Rx2 UNLOCK
COM 3 (4800/38.4kbps)
RX2 RX2 MUTE
J16(8p) MONITOR,
CLK PLL
(24P0033B) DATA PLL or HI LEVEL I/F
RX2 ST
RX2 36kHz
COM 4 IEC61162-1/2
(4800/38.4kbps) SENSOR or
J17(10p)
13.6V-1
13.6V-2
EXT Display
J1 J1 5V
PWR PF COM 5 IEC61162-1/2
(24P0037) SW(+) (4800/38.4kbps)
DC(-)
DC(+)
J18(10p) SENSOR
CB1(10A) B(+)
COM 6 IEC61162-1/2
Breaker J22 (4800/38.4kbps) / AD-10
12-24Vdc J19(13p) or SENSOR
TB1 AD-10
EXT ALM
Contact sig.
MOT J8(5p) Alarm System
(24P0036)
Fig. 5.1.1 FA-1501 Block diagram
5-1
VHF ANTENNA
GPA-017S GSC-001-FA
- 150M-W2VN
- FAB-151D
GPS/VHF
0.2m
0.6m
ANTENNA TNC-J-3
NJ-TNCP
GVA-100 MP-7
GSC-001
RG-10/UY MP-7
FAB-151D
DB-1 N-P-8DFB VHF ANT
N-P-8DFB N-J-3
0.8m
- RG-10/UY (Max. 20m)

NJ-TP-3DXV-1
- 8D-FB-CV (30/50m)
TNC-PS-3D-15 (15m) GPS ANT
MP-3
(DISTRIBUTOR)
- RG-10/UY (Max. 20m) 1m VHF ANT
- 8D-FB-CV (30/50m) N-P-8DFB N-J-3
DB-1
1m
TNC-P-3
1m
GPS ANT
VHF antenna GPS antenna GPS/VHF combined antenna

FAB-151D GSC-001
GVA-100 + FAB-151D + DB-1
150M-W2VN GPA-017S
Fig. 5.1.2 FA-150 VHF/GPS Antenna system
5-2
5.1.2 Outline of Board

1. FA-1501
Table 5.1.1 FA-1501 outline
Board name Outline

Consists of MAIN CPU, SUB CPU, and its peripheral circuits.
Controlling/processing of AIS (DSC) communications and I/O interfacing are done
MAIN
by the MAIN CPU.
(24P0035)
Processing of TDMA/DSC modulation/demodulation and the analog-interfacing
with the radio part are done by the SUB CPU.
GMSK-modulated signal of 45 MHz is input from the MAIN board and
TX up-converted into the transmitting frequency and power-amplified.
(24P0032) RF power module (HPA) U1 (RA35H1516M) amplifies the transmitting frequency
into 12.5 W.
DSC DSC receiving signal is down-converted into the 36 kHz IF signal.
(24P0034) The receiving frequency is CH70: 156.525 MHz.
AIS receiving signal (TDMA) is down-converted into the 36 kHz IF signal.
Circuit configuration is almost same as those for RX2 board. Basically receiving
RX1
frequencies of CH-A (Primary channel) are allocated for RX1 board.
(24P0033A)
Note:
Not compatible with RX2 board, because the 1st IF frequency is not the same.
AIS receiving signal (TDMA) is down-converted into the 36 kHz IF signal.
RX2 Circuit configuration is almost same as those for RX1 board. Basically receiving
(24P0033B) frequencies of CH-B (Secondary channel) are allocated for RX2 board.
(Also see above note.)
PWR Consists of the switching regulators to convert the input voltages of +12 to +24
(24P0037) VDC to +13.6 VDC x 2 and +5 VDC for use in each board.
Mother board for MAIN, RX1, RX2, DSC and PWR boards.
MOT
And external equipment such as sensors and radars are connected to the terminals
(24P0036)
of the board.
GPS GPS module for receiving the GPS signal of L1: 1575.42 MHz.
(GN-8093) Number of receiving channels is 12 parallel (12-satellite tracking).
GPS TB
For relaying the GPS receiving signal.
(24P0043)
2. FA-1502
Table 5.1.2 FA-1502 outline
PCB name Outline
CPU AIS information display (MKD) and the system setting-up.

Communications interface of RS-422 with FA-1501 are conducted at 38.5 kbps
（24P0062）
data rate.
5-3
5.2 FA-1501 Block Description

5.2.1 TX Board (24P0032)
VHF ANT
13.6V-1
156.025MHz
162.025MHz ANT
45MHz
TX_45MHz HPA SW
CH1 : 161.975MHz (CH87B)
CLK_PLL CH2 : 162.025MHz (CH88B)
DATA_PLL 201.025MHz DSC : 156.525MHz (CH70)
207.025MHz
TX_ST
PLL RX_RF
TX_UNLOCK
DSC_19.2MHz
19.2MHz
RX2_19.2MHz
19.2MHz
RX1_19.2MHz
2
PTT1/2
PWR_REF
R_VSWR TX
MONI
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of TX board
The TX board consists of the reference oscillator, frequency converter, TX PLL, power
amplifier and TX/RX antenna switching circuits.
The GMSK-modulated TX signal of 45 MHz input from MAIN board is up-converted
to the TX signal of 150 MHz band and then amplified into 12.5 W in the HPA module.
Reference oscillation frequency of 19.2 MHz is used for the TX board, and also as the
PLL reference oscillation frequency for DSC, RX1 and RX2 boards.
5-4
RX RF
CR1 CR2
156.025MHz 162.025MHz
J1
U9
TX 45MHz FL1(45MHz) (NJM2594M) FL(L/C) ANT
IN HPA OUT
LPF 1 U2 4
Q15 Q12 Q7 Q1
U1(RA35H1516M) (LC) (DCS3D20)
J4 CR4 J2
FWD
2 3
REV
BIAS Vcc
TX 1st Lo
(201.025MHz 207.025MHz)
J3-21 PTT1 13.6V
PTT1
CR7
CR10
Q21,16,17
Q5
(LMX2353TMX)
J3-25 CLK PLL CLK

J3-27 DATA PLL VCO Q4
DATA Q2
PLL IC
(CR11/12,U5/6,Q8) J3-22 PTT2

J3-29 TX ST ST
J3-17 TX UNLOCK UNLOCK
U10
Q22
Q11 Q3
Y1
19.2MHz (19.2MHz) CR6
Q23
R166
Q13,14 U11 U4
J3-9 RX2 19.2MHz
J3-11 RX1 19.2MHz R133
J3-13 DSC 19.2MHz
R14 U4
13.6V U3
CR9 J3-20 R VSWR
CH1 : 161.975MHz (CH87B) J3-19 MONI
J3-1/3/5 13.6V-1 U7 9V CH2 : 162.025MHz (CH88B)
(TA7809F) DSC : 156.525MHz (CH70) J3-23 PWR REF
U3
U8 3.3V
(TA48L033F)
Fig. 5.2.2 Block diagram of TX board
The GMSK-modulated TX signal of 45 MHz (-30 dBm) coming from MAIN board is
input to U9 (frequency converter) via Q15, FL1 and Q12. FL1 is a BPF (Passband
width: +10 kHz), and reduces the spurious components included in the TX modulated
signals.
At U9, the TX 45 MHz modulated signal is mixed with the 1st Local oscillation
frequency of 201.025 MHz to 207.025 MHz, and then converted to the transmitting
frequency of 156.025 MHz to 162.025 MHz. Next stage of FL (L/C) is the BPF with the
L/C circuits, reducing the spurious components generated by the frequency conversion.
U1 is an HPA module (RA35H1516M), amplifying the input signal with about +10 dBm
up to 12.5 W +1.5 dB.
Note:
TX power tolerance: +1.5 dB for 12.5 W/2 W
RA35H1516M
(154 MHz to 162 MHz, 40 W RF MOS-FET AMP Module)
(2) (3) (1): RF Input(Pin) VDD = 12.5 V, VGG = 5 V,

(5)
(1)
(4)
(5) (2): Gate Voltage(VGG) Where Pin = 50 mW,
(3): Drain Voltage(VDD) Output: 40 W or more,
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(4): RF Output(Pout) Efficiency: 50 % or more.
(5): RF Ground(Case) 2nd harmonics: -50 dBc or less.
5-5
TX spurious components output from HPA is reduced by the LPF (L/C). The intensity
of the spurious radiation is suppressed down to the level of -77 dB (0.25 µW) or less
through the stages of the HPA and LPF.
Fig. 5.2.3 TX spectrum
And then TX signal is forwarded to VHF ANT terminal via U2 CM coupler.

Y1 is a 19.2 MHz reference oscillator for PLL circuit in the TX board with the accuracy
of +1 ppm for maintaining TX frequency tolerance within the limit of +3 ppm (+450
Hz).
Main Control and Detection signals

PWR REF
For setting up the TX power output to 0 W, 1 W, 2 W or 12.5 W.
The level setting of TX power output is done by controlling the BIAS level of the
HPA by using the FWD signal from U2 and the PWR REF signal.
TX power is set to 12.5 W by adjusting the potentiometer: R133 when TX power
selection of 12.5 W is made.
(See Fig. 5.2.2.)
R VSWR
Detects the reflected (reverse) voltage (REV) from U2 CM Coupler.
The error message “ANT” appears for announcing the abnormality of the VHF
ANT circuits when the ratio of VSWR reaches 3 or above.
VSWR is converted from the voltages of R-VSWR, not calculated from both of
F-VSWR and R-VSWR.
5-6
MONI
Detects the forward wave voltages (MONI) from U2.
The error message “TX” appears for announcing the TX abnormality when the
voltages fall below the specified limit during TX operation.
Voltage limits (output power) are as follows:
- 0.25 W or less for TX power of 1 W,
- 0.7 W or less for 2 W,
- 4 W or less for 12.5 W.
And also the error message “TX” appears when the MONI voltages are detected
during no TX operation.
CR6/R13
TX monitor of LED
CR6 goes on during
TX operation.
Note:
Relation between R-VSWR and MONI voltages
TX power 12.5 W 2W
R VSWR voltage +0.3 VDC to +0.5 VDC +0.2 VDC to +0.5 VDC
MONI voltage +1.6 VDC to +2.0 VDC +0.6 VDC to +1.0 VDC
PTT1, PTT2
PTT1 signal controls U9, and also PTT2 does HPA peripheral circuits. Both are
control signals for switching TX/RX and controlled with the same timing.
TX UNLOCK
The error message “TX” appears for announcing the TX abnormality when the TX
PLL circuits operation becomes unlocked.
VCO control voltages of TP1 are +3.5 VDC to +5.0 VDC for the TX frequency of
156.026 MHz and +5.0 VDC to +6.0 VDC for 161.975 MHz.
5-7
Distribution of 19.2 MHz Reference Oscillation frequency of Y1

19.2 MHz reference oscillation frequency of Y1 (TCXO: Temperature
Compensated Crystal Oscillator) on TX board is distributed to RX1 and RX2
boards as the reference of the PLL circuits and to DSC board as the reference to
generate the 2nd local oscillation, in addition to TX board.
Frequency adjustment is not necessary for Y1.
If the tolerance of the VHF TX frequency is exceeded by +3 ppm or more, replace
the TX board.
TX
(24P0032)
REF
1st Lo 19.2MHz
PLL
DSC
(24P0034)
2nd Lo
x2
38.4MHz
RX1
(24P0033A)
1st Lo
PLL
RX2
(24P0033B)
1st Lo
PLL
Fig. 5.2.4 Distribution of 19.2 MHz Reference oscillation frequencies
5-8
5.2.2 RX-1 (24P0033A) and RX-2 (24P0033B) Boards

Down-converts the AIS receiving signal (TDMA) to 36 kHz IF signal.
Circuits including RX1 and RX2 boards are almost the same except for the 1st IF and
2nd local oscillation frequencies. Receiving frequencies of CH-A are allocated for RX1
board and CH-B for RX2. So, note that both are not compatible.
13. 6V-2
51.1375MHz 156.025MHz
36kHz 162. 025MHz RX1_RF
RX1_36kHz
CLK_PLL 207.1625MHz
51.1015MHz 213.1625MHz
DATA_PLL
x2 PLL
RX1_ST
RX1_MUTE 25.55075MHz
19. 2MHz
RX1_UNLOCK
RX1_19. 2MHz RX1
13. 6V-2
51.2375MHz 156.025MHz
36kHz 162.025MHz RX2_RF
RX2_36kHz
CLK_PLL 207.2625MHz
51.2015MHz 213.2625MHz
DATA_PLL
x2 PLL
RX2_ST
RX2_MUTE 25.60075MHz
19. 2MHz
RX2_UNLOCK
RX2_19. 2MHz RX2
Fig. 5.2.5 Outline of RX1 and RX2 boards
Note: Correspondence between RX1/2 Boards and CH-A /-B

The Channels displayed when you open the VIEW CHANNEL screen by the key
entry of [MENU] -> CHANNEL SETTINGS are indicated as the primary channel for
CH-A and as the secondary channel for CH-B.
And on the EDIT CHANNEL screen selected by the key entry of [MENU] ->
CHANNEL SETTINGS, the channel manually registered for CH-A corresponds to
the primary channel and RX1 board, and for CH-B to the secondary channel and RX2
board.
In the regional operating area where the channels are automatically set by AIS (MSG.
22) or DSC message, and automatically switched from the primary to the secondary
and vice versa in the transitional zone, note that the correspondence between the
RX1/2 boards and CH-A /-B would be changed.
5-9
RX1 (51.1375MHz) RX1 (51.1375MHz) U11

U1
RX RF (AD831AP)
RX2 (51.2375MHz) RX2 (51.2375MHz) (NJM2594M)
L27
Q6 Q8 U8
J2-19 36kHz
J1 FL1 FL2
C163
Rx1 1st Lo 2nd Lo
Q10
(207.1625MHz 213.1625MHz) C118 RX1 (51.1015MHz)
Rx2 1st Lo RX2 (51.2015MHz) Y1
(207.2625MHz 213.2625MHz)
x2
Q9 U6
13.6V-2 VCO
(CR2/3,U2/3,Q2/3)
J2-1/2 13.6V-2 RX1 (25.55075MHz)
CR5 RX2 (25.60075MHz)
CP F in
J2-14 CLK PLL CR6 CR4
CLK U12(TA7809F)
Q11 U10
(LMX2353TMX)
J2-15 DATA PLL DATA +9V
R82
REG
J2-16 RX ST ST R95
PLL IC
C112
J2-11 RX UNLOCK UNLOCK U9(TA48L033F)
+3.3V C130
Q7 REG C117 CR6
U5 J2-12 RX MUTE
U4
J2-7 RX 19.2MHz OSC in
Q13 Q12 (Not used)
Fig. 5.2.6 Block diagram of RX1, RX2 boards
AIS receiving signal (TDMA) is fed to U1 via L27 and C163.

L27 and C163 are composing the 200 MHz band-trap filter for eliminating the leakage
of the 1st local frequency components toward the terminal of [RX RF]. At U1, 150 MHz
AIS receiving signal is mixed with the 1st local frequency components of 207 MHz to
213 MHz, and down-converted to 51 MHz 1st IF signal.
FL1 and FL2 following U1 are the BPFs (Passband width: +4.5 kHz for FL1, +10 kHz
for FL2) and are reducing the spurious components generated with the frequency
conversion.
Y1 is the 25.55075 MHz reference oscillator for RX1 (25.60075 MHz for RX2) with
the accuracy of +2.5 ppm. Y1 output frequency is up-converted to the 2nd local
frequency of 51.1015 MHz for RX1 (51.2015 MHz for RX2) by the frequency doubler
U6.
At U11, the 51 MHz IF signal is mixed with the 2nd local frequency components and
down-converted to the 36 kHz signal fed to MAIN board. Antenna input signal of 50
ohm/-107 dBm corresponds to the 36 kHz signal of 600 ohm/+60 dBµV.
Q10, CR4, U10 and Q11 compose the AGC circuits. The level of the input signal fed to
U11 is suppressed to the fixed level by the CR5 PIN diode which is controlled by the
AGC output voltage.
AGC operation is activated from the antenna input level of -50 dBm or more.
5-10
-10
-20 162.025MHz
-30
36kHz
SSG in --> ANT port

-40 Pick-up --> MAIN p.c.b; C63
OUTPUT (dBm)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-130 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20
RF INPUT (dBm)
Fig. 5.2.7 Input vs Output signal level for RX1 board
Main Control and Detection signals

RX UNLOCK
The error message “CH1” or “CH2” appears during an RX abnormality when the
RX PLL circuit operation becomes unlocked.
In case of the message “CH1”, RX1 Board (24P0033A) should be suspected as the
cause of failure, and RX2 board (24P0033B) for “CH2”.
VCO control voltages of TP4 are +3.0 VDC to +4.5 VDC for the RX frequency of
156.026 MHz and +4.3 VDC to +5.8 VDC for 161.975 MHz.
RX MUTE
Not used.
5-11
5.2.3 DSC Board (24P0034)

CH70 DSC receiving signal of 156.525 MHz is down-converted to the 36 kHz IF
signal.
Fig. 5.2.8 Outline of DSC board
RX2 RF J3
T1 J1-7
J4 (DIV) DSC19. 2MHz x2 38.4MHz
Q9
RX1 RF 156.525MHz 38.364MHz
Q6
CH70 BPF U6
VHF BPF CH70 BPF FL1 FL2(38.364MHz) (NJM2594M)
RX RF (L/C) (L/C) (L/C) U8(DMY210) (38.364MHz) C37
J1-19 DSC 36kHz
Q5 Q3 Q14 Q11 Q10 U4x2
J2 C129 2nd Lo
1st Lo (38.4MHz)
C37 (118.161MHz) x4 CR4
Q8
U7
Y1
( 29.54025MHz)
CR2
13.6V-2
J1-1/2 13.6V-2 CR1 CR3
Q1 U5 Q7
C75
R53
R54
C77
Fig. 5.2.9 Block diagram of DSC board
The receiving signal input from RX RF terminal is fed to the “VHF BPF” with the L/C
circuits and Q5 and then distributed to DSC RX circuits, RX1 board and RX2 board by
the divider T1. Q5 is a 6 dB amplifier for compensating the divider loss of T1. CH70
receiving signal is fed to U8 via CH70 BPF with L/C circuits and Q3.
Y1 is a 29.54025 MHz oscillator with the accuracy of +2.5 ppm. At U7, the oscillation
output frequency is multiplied by 4 into the 1st local frequency of 118.161 MHz.
At U8, CH70 DSC receiving signal is mixed with the 1st local frequency components
and down-converted to the 38.364 MHz 1st IF signal.
5-12
FL1 and FL2 following U8 are the BPFs (Passband width: +10 kHz) reducing the
spurious components generated by frequency conversion.
DSC signal of 19.2 MHz from TX board is up-converted to the 2nd local oscillation
frequency of 38.4 MHz by the frequency doubler Q6.
At U6, 1st IF signal of 38.364 MHz is mixed with the 2nd local frequency and
down-converted to 36 kHz signal fed to MAIN board. Antenna input signal of 50
ohm/-107 dBm corresponds to the 36 kHz signal of 600 ohm/+60 dBuV.
Q7, CR3, U5 and Q1 compose the AGC circuits having 2 lines controlling for RF and
IF circuits.
For RF circuits, the level of the input signal fed to Q3 is suppressed to the fixed level by
the CR2 PIN diode which is controlled by the AGC output voltage. For IF circuits, the
input signal to U6 is also suppressed by the CR4 PIN diode.
AGC operation is activated from the Antenna input level of -50 dBm or more.
Reference:
Input vs Output signal level for DSC board is almost same characteristic as those for
RX1 board. See Fig.5.2.7.
5-13
5.2.4 MAIN Board (24P0035)
3.3V 1.5V
Jumper U29 U25

MAIN (24P0035)
TRS-CTS
PC DTR-DST
TD/RD FLASH
I/F Do-D15
(64Mbits) GPS DATA
U2 1pps GPS
Do-D31
SDRAM SDRAM GPS Backup
(128Mbits) Do-D15
(16Mbits) (1F)
SCIF U24
U8 SDRAM D16-D31
DISP (16Mbits)
DIP
SW U23 SUB CPU RESET
MOT S3
MAIN
3.3V 1.8V
T/R Block
CPU
COM-1 (SH4) FPGA U7
RESET Do-D15 DDS
U6 data
32bit DDS TX
SUB
COM-2 32bit U18 CODEC 1 CPU
COM T/RX U14
FPGA (SH4) FPGA
RX-1
CODEC 2
CODEC 1
PTT 1/2 RX-2
COM-3 ADD
ADC U13
FPGA
DAC
DDS data CODEC 2 DSC
COM-4
RESET 18.432MHz 18.432MHz
PTT 1/2
18.432MHz U19
COM-5 FPGA MONI
ADC VSWR
U15
COM-6 FPGA
DAC
PWR REF
JTAG
EXT ALM
Fig. 5.2.10 Block diagram of MAIN board
The Board consists of MAIN CPU, SUB CPU, FPGA and peripheral circuits. Main
functions are as follows:
MAIN CPU
For controlling and processing the AIS (DSC) communication system and I/O
interfacing.
SUB CPU
For the TDMA/DSC signal processing and the analog-interfacing with the radio
section.
FPGA
For the asynchronous serial communication with the external equipment, the timing
control of the AIS (TDMA) communication, the TDMA slot forming and
interfacing with the CODEC I/O, DDS Output, MAIN CPU and SUB CPU.
DDS
The GMSK-modulated signal of AIS (TDMA) or FM-modulated signal of DSC
generated by SUB CPU is converted to 45 MHz signal by DDS and fed to TX
board.
5-14
CODEC1
The 36 kHz AIS (TDMA) receiving signals are input from RX1 and RX2 boards,
AD-converted, fed to SUB CPU via FPGA and then demodulated.
CODEC2
The 36 kHz DSC receiving signal is input from DSC board, AD-converted, fed to
SUB CPU via FPGA and then demodulated.
Table 5.2.1 Memory allocation for FA-1501
Memory IC/ Capacity Type Contents description
- MAIN CPU Program

- SUB CPU Program
- FPGA Program
- INITIAL SETTINGS
- CHANNEL SETTINGS
- PWR ON/OFF HISTORY
U25: FLASH ROM
MBM29DL640E90TN - TX ON/OFF HISTORY
64 M (8 M x 8 / 4 M x 16) bits
- CH & PWR SETTINGS
- USER SETTING -> LR MODE
- SILENT MENU
- NAV STATUS
- MSG (CREATE MSG, TX LOG,
RX LOG)
RAM for MAIN CPU
U24: SDRAM
EDS1232AATA_75_E (Storage area of data at the time of
128 M bits
carrying out a program)
U2: SDRAM
IC42S16100_7T RAM for SUB CPU
16 M bits (512 k x 16 bits x 2)
(Storage area of data at the time of
U8: SDRAM carrying out a program)
IC42S16100_7T
16 M bits (512 k x 16 bits x 2)
5-15
5.2.5 MOT Board (24P0036)

EXT ALM
DC IN COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 COM 6 DISP
ALM A/B/C
ALM ACK
IEC61162-1/2
IEC61162-1/2
IEC61162-1/2
IEC61162-1/2
IEC61162-1/2
IEC61162-1/2
RS-422
C.Loop
C.Loop
C.Loop
FIL I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F
AD DATA RD
AD CLK RD
SNSR1 RD
SNSR2 RD
SNSE3 RD
MOT
COM3 RD
COM4 RD
COM5 RD
COM6 RD
COM7 RD
COM8 RD
COM1 RD
ALM ACK
COM3 TD
COM4 TD
COM5 TD
COM6 TD
COM7 TD
COM8 TD
COM1 TD
ALM
TD/RD
PWR
MAIN
Fig. 5.2.11 Block diagram of MOT board
The specifications of this port are compatible with RS-422, and TD-A/B and RD-A/B
lines have the I/O circuits electrically separated by U2:LTC1535.
In addition, the jumper between #7 and #8 of COM ports are a termination resistor of
the data line. When more than one are connected to the TD-A/B line on the transmission
side, the termination resistor should be mounted on the receiver side which has the
electrically longest wiring.
In the case of connecting FA-150 only, use a jumper to connect #7 and #8.
T2 CR28
31160R BAT54C MOT p.c.b
(24P0036) COM1
J14
FIL 3 GND ISO
FIL 6 GND ISO

R4-6
8 COM1 JP
A
B
RE N
RD2
DE U2 FIL 4 COM1 RD A
COM 3(1) TD LTC1535C
DI
Y
FIL 2 COM1 TD B
RS-422
Z
SI D N
FIL 1 COM1 TD A
GND GND2
Fig. 5.2.12 I/F of COM Port
5-16
5.2.6 PWR Board (24P0037)

1. Power ON/OFF control system
The following figure shows the power ON/OFF circuit diagram.
When connecting the additional FA-1502, connect the power control line #5 and #6 of
the additional FA-1502 to [DISP] port #7 and #8 of FA-1501.
System power ON/OFF control can be made by No. 1 FA-1502 or No.2 FA-1502
whichever you want.
Connect the data line (RD/TD) to COM2 or COM3 port, and set I/O port to MONITOR
for MODE and to IEC 61162-2 for SPEED.
No.1
POWER SW
COM U114:G3VM
FA-1501 (MOS RL)
#5: SW H Vcc(+5V)
6 REG
#6: SW C 1
5
4 2
MOT(24P0036)
J21 S1
FA-1502
PWR
+10V
+13.5V Q12 B.P
SW DC input
+5V R52
SW
GND REG
No.2
SW P
10V POWER SW
REG R64
R65
U16
DC M
DC+
SW P U114:G3VM
DISP (MOS RL)
DC+
DC M
#7: SW H #5: SW H Vcc(+5V)

#8: SW C 6 REG
#6: SW C 1
5
4 2
PWR(24P0037) FA-1502
CB1
PWR
TB1 DC input (+12 - 24VDC)
DC+
FIL
DC M TB2
DC Power
Fig. 5.2.13 Power ON/OFF Control system diagram
Power ON sequence
1. Supply the power to FA-1501 and FA-1502, and then turn on the power switch of
FA-1502.
2. U114 (MOS RL) of FA-1502 will be ON.
3. U16 (Photo-coupler) of FA-1501 will be ON and Q12 on the PWR board will be
controlled to be ON and then FA-1501 will get started.
Note:
In the case that Power switch of FA-1501 is not turned ON, or FA-1501 does not
get started, the message “COMMUNICATION ERROR” will be displayed.
5-17
2. PWR board
Contains the switching regulator with the switching frequencies of 45 kHz + 2 kHz. The
switching frequency adjustment is made by R25 and at TP4, 3-TP2 (GND). Refer to the
next page.
DC output voltages are +13.6 VDC-1, +13.6 VDC-2 and +5 VDC. Short-circuit
protections is accomplished with the Poly-switches (Current-limiting resistors RT81,
RT82 and RT83). Power supply reverse polarity protection is made with CR1. If the
reverse polarity connection, check the Circuit-Breaker of FA-1501.
If the voltage drop down to +10 VDC or less for +13.6 VDC output, the signal of “PF:
Power Fail” is output from CR52, Q51 and Q52 to MAIN board, and “PWR-OFF”
event is indicated/recorded in the “POWER ON/OFF HISTORY” log screen.
Table 5.2.2 Specifications for power supply protection circuits
Protection circuit Protection circuit operation Note

Power supply Power supply input stops for the input
over-voltage voltage of +34 VDC to +38 VDC.
Power supply input stops for the input
Power supply low-voltage
voltage of +7 VDC to +9 VDC.
Power supply reverse
CR1, Circuit-Breaker
polarity connection
Current-limiting activates for 5.3 A to
Output over-current For +5 VDC output.
8.1 A.
Power supply input stops for 10 A. For +13.6 VDC-1 output.
Output short-circuit
Power supply input stops for 2.7 A. For +13.6 VDC-2 output.
Output low-voltage Detected at +10 VDC or less for
Outputs PF signal.
detection +13.6 VDC-1, 2 outputs.
CR51 L51
+12 - +24VDC T1 RT81
DC(+) SW REG 13.6V-1
Input FIL (Q1,2,53,54)
DC(-)
CR1
RT82
B(+) Switch,
13.6V-2
SW REG Output Voltage
SW(+) Input Voltage Control
Monitor Circuit Control Circuit
DC(-) Circuit
U52:TLP181-Y
U11: RC9528 U21: RC9501 U53: PC1093T
RT83
5V REG
(DC-DC) 5V
CR52 ( LM2679T-5.0)
10V
Output Low Voltage

Detect Circuit PF
Q51, 52
Fig. 5.2.14 Block diagram of PWR board
5-18
R25（FREQ.） TP51(+13.6 V check) TP52(GND)
TP4
(Q54：SW FET-drain)
TP53
(+5 VDC check)
TP2
(Primary circuit GND)
TP1
(Primary circuit AVR output:
8.9 – 9.9 VDC)
TP3
(Q53：SW FET-drain)
Fig. 5.2.15 PWR board
5-19
J2(MJ-10)
TD-A 1 1 U110 Data U7

TD-B 2 2 RS-422 ROM
Add.
TX/RX I/F (MBM29DL800BC)
RD-A 3 3 (SN75LBC179)
U6
RD-B 4 4 U8
CPU SDRAM
SW-H 5 5 (SH3) (IC42S16100-7T)
MOS Relay
SW-C 6 6 (G3VM-61E)
U112
GND 7 7 U114 SDRAM
(IC42S16100-7T)
GND 8 8
+5V
NC 9 9
FG 10 +5V
LCD U10
(T6K04)
Power ON Reset Panel illumination

U9 Q1 (LEDx6)
LED Driver
U13 GATE ARRAY (DTD143EKT146) LED illumination
(20S0315) (LEDx5)
J1(MJ-3) Reset IC
FL8 U12 Q2 Buzzer
Buzzer Driver
DC IN+ 1 1 +5V (DTD143EKT146) (SD129T3-Ax2)
REG
LIne FIL (+5V)
DC IN- 2 2
U14 Key matrix
FG 3 3 (SWx9)
+3.3V
REG
(+3.3V)
PWR key
Fig. 5.3.1 Block diagram of FA-1502
FA-1501 and FA-1502 mutually communicate with each other using the RS-422 format.
NMEA sentences with VDM for AIS receive data and VDO including the navigation
information and own-ship’s data, and P sentences for operation, setting and display, etc.
are included in the communication data.
Table 5.3.1 Memory allocation for FA-1502
Memory IC/ Capacity Type Contents description
- MAIN Program
U7: FLASH ROM - USER SETTINGS
MBM29DL800BC
8 M bits (1 M bits x 8/ 512 k x 16) (except for LR MODE)
- DIMMER/CONTRAST
U8: DRAM RAM for MAIN CPU

HY57V161610ETP-7
16 M bits (2 x 512 k x 16) (Storage area of data at the
U112: DRAM time of carrying out a
HY57V161610ETP-7 program)
16 M bits (2 x 512 k x 16)
5-20
Chapter 6. Updating Program
6.1 General
6.1 General
6.1.1 Program files
There are 2 programs, groups of files required to update a complete FA-150 system: One
for the Transponder unit FA-1501, and the other for Monitor unit FA-1502.
Program-updating is made via the “RS-232C PC” port on the Transponder unit. In the
following table, program folders and the descriptions of their files are shown. File size is
just for reference.
Table 6.1.1 Program file
Program folder File name Size Description

BIN file,
FA1501.BIN 994 KB
Main CPU, SUB CPU and FPGA Programs
UPFA1501
BIN file,
LDALL.BIN 17 KB
LOADER program for FA-1501
FA-1501
UpFA1501.bat 1 KB Batch file
(Transponder unit)
Application file,
Uppg.exe 189 KB
EXE file for program loading
BIN file
FA1502.BIN 926 KB
Program for FA-1502
UPFA1502
BIN file
LDFA1502.BIN 3 KB
LOADER program for FA-1502
FA-1502
UPFA1502.BAT 1 KB Batch file
(Monitor unit)
Application file,
UPPG.EXE 60 KB
EXE file for program loading
- FA1501 Batch file (UPFA1501.BAT)

uppg LDALL.BIN FA1501.BIN 0 0 200 2 1
pause

uppg ldfa1502 bin fa1502 bin 0 0 50 1 1
pause
6-1
6.1 General
6.1.2 Preliminary Notes on Software Updates

1. Program-updating for both the FA-1501 and FA-1502 are made by using the [PC] port
of the Transponder unit FA-1501. A DB9 to DB9 straight through cable (non-null)
must be used. The electrical specifications for the [PC] port follow the RS-232C
format. Data transfer rate for updating is 57.6 kbps for FA-1501, and 38.4 kbps for
FA-1502. (Note that these speeds are automatically set by the UPPG.EXE file when it
is initiated.) The date transfer protocols are as follows.
- Format - Data bit: 8 - Stop bit: 1
- Parity bit: none
- Flow control - None
Note:
If you only need to update the FA-1502 LCD display’s software, “TD/RD” of the
“COM Port” of FA-1502 can be used instead of the [PC] port of FA-1501. The
electrical specifications for the FA-1502 display’s COM port follow the RS-422
format, so an RS-422 - RS-232C converter should be used when connecting it to
the PC.
2. When the serial port of the PC is not assigned to [COM-1], rewrite the Batch file or
change the PCs COM port setting to [COM-1]. (See procedure below)
3. “Port-setting e.g. Speed, Data bit, Flow control, etc” for the serial port of the PC is
not necessary, because it is automatically set-up from the file of UPPG.EXE during
updating.
6.1.3 Procedure for rewriting the COM Port for the batch file so
that it will use some other COM port on your PC
1. Open “Device Manager” window in “Control Panel” -> “System” menus, and confirm
the COM Port number that you want to use to update the FA-150. For example, if you
are using a USB to RS-232C converter, it might be identified as COM3.
2. Select the appropriate batch file to be modified (display software or processor
software) and open its file from the (File) - “Edit” menu. (Batch files can usually be
opened in MS Windows’ Text Editor.)
3. Modify the number (underlined) to reflect the appropriate COM port that you want to
use on your PC.

uppg LDALL.BIN FA1501.BIN 0 0 200 2 1
pause

uppg ldfa1502.bin fa1502.bin 0 0 50 1 1
pause
6-2
6.1 General
For example, to use COM3 of your PC to do the update on an FA-1501, open

UPFA1501.BAT in text editor, then rewrite “uppg LDALL.BIN FA1501.BIN 0 0
200 2 1” to “-------- BIN 0 0 200 2 3”.
4. Select “Save” in the “FILE” menu and save the edited text. If an error appears
notifying you that the file cannot be saved, right-click on the batch file icon and select
the “General” tag in the Property menu. Then, confirm that there is no check mark in
“Read-only” box.
6.1.4 Confirming program numbers

Confirming the program number for the unit FA-1501
1. Press [MENU] key. Select “DIAGNOSTICS” and press [ENT] key.
2. Select “TRANSPONDER TEST” and press [ENT] key.
3. Select “MEMORY TEST” and press [ENT] key. Confirm the program Ver. on this
window.
[MEMORY TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
2450018-01.0X
Program Ver.
MAIN ROM : OK
MAIN RAM : OK
SUB RAM : OK
Confirming the program number for the unit FA-1502

1. Press [MENU] key. Select “DIAGNOSTICS” and press [ENT] key.
2. Select “MEMORY TEST” and press [ENT] key. Confirm the program Ver. on
this window.
[MONITOR TEST]
BOOT NO. : 2450020-01.02 Confirm PROG NO.
PROG NO. : 2450021-01.0X BOOT Program is rewritten at the factory.
ROM : OK CONT : xx
SDRAM : OK DIM: xx
PORT : OK
KEY : xxxxx
6-3
6.1 General
6.1.5 Connection
The PC may be connected to the units FA-1501 and FA-1502 only with TD/RD (TX/RX)
and GND lines. Control lines such as DSR, DTR are not used.
Table 6.1.1 9 pin D-Sub: Straight Cable

9 Pin FA-1501 [PC]
PC
D-sub port
Power switch
1 DCD N.C
2 RXD PC SD
FA-1502
3 TXD PC RD
4 DTR DTR
5 GND 0V
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
8 CTS CTS
9 RI N.C
Frame Shield Shield
FA-1501
Power switch
[COM] port
DIS
[PC] port
9 pin D-Sub Straight Cable
Fig. 6.1.1 Connection for updating program (for FA-1501 and FA-1502)
FA-1502
COM
COM
1. TX-A
TD/RD/GND 2. TX-B
PC RS422 - RS232C 3. RX-A
Converter 4. RX-B
RS-232C RS-422 7. GND 24VDC
Fig. 6.1.2 Connection for updating program (for FA-1502 directly)
6-4
6.2 Updating Procedure

The update procedures for the FA-1501 and FA-1502 are identical.
Updating time:
- FA-1501; approximately 10 minutes
- FA-1502; approximately 13 minutes
6.2.1 Procedure
1. Turn off the powers for both the FA-1501 and FA-1502.
2. Open the appropriate program folder to be update.
3. Double-click the Batch file icon of the Program to be used.
FA-1501 FA-1502
4. An DOS prompt window will appears message; TARGET POWER ON is indicated,

turn on the power of FA-1501, and then, turn on the power of FA-1502.
Designated COM Port No.
TARGET POWER ON
6-5
5. Program updating starts automatically.

During the update, “INITIALIZING” message will be shown on the display. After
that “COMMUNICATION ERROR” message will also be shown. This is normal.
Status indication of updating Progress (%)
6. When the update is completed, “Finish version up” message appears. Press the
“Enter” key of PC and close DOS prompt window.
Finish version up
7. Turn off the powers of FA-1501 and FA-1502, and restore the system to its original
operating parameters.
6-6
Chapter 7. Measurement
7.1 General
7.1.1 Measurement Flow
Note:
Note that a transmission will automatically shut off after 60 seconds. Checks
must be taken within this time.
START
Connect the measuring instrument.
Power-on
Set POWER/CH-A
in "CH&PWR SETTING" window Password:
PASSWORD:
from "FOR SERVICE" menu. [UP][DOWN][LEFT][RIGHT][NAV-STATUS]
[UP][DOWN][RIGHT][LEFT][NAV STATUS]
CH-SET: "MANUAL". [DIM][DISP][ENT][MENU][NAV-STATUS]
[DIM][DISP][ENT][MENU][NAV STATUS]
Set "TXF" among "PN PATERN", "TYPE1",

"TYPE2, DSC1(Y), DSC(2), DSC(3) and Pattern: TXF
TXF in "TX TEST" window from TX START: [DIM]
"FOR SERVICE" menu. TX STOP: [MENU]
Measure the TX frequency and TX Power.

Measurement should be finished within 60’s.
Yes on other TX Freq.

or other Tx power setting?
No
Set POWER/CH-A
in "CH&PWR SETTING" window Important!
from "FOR SERVICE" menu. CH-SET: AUTO
CH-SET: "AUTO".
Disconnect the measuring instrument.
Power-off
END
Fig. 7.1.1 Measurement Flow
7-1
7.1 General
7.1.2 Connection of Measuring Instrument

1. Connect a 50 ohm coaxial cable between power meter and [VHF] connector of the
FA-1501, and connect other side of power meter to a 50 ohm dummy load.
2. Set a pick-up coil with five to ten turns to the VHF ANT cable for measuring TX
frequency.
50 ohm Power meter

(12.5W/2W）
50 ohm
Co-x cable 50 ohm Dummy
FA-1501 Load
FA-150 Pick-up coil
VHF (5∼10t)
Frequency
Counter
Fig. 7.1.2 Connection
7-2
7.2 Measurement and Adjustment

7.2.1 Measurement of TX Output power and TX frequency
Setting FREQ./POWER/CH SET

1. Press [MENU] key. Select “FOR SERVICE” in DIAGNOSTICS menu and press
[ENT] key. The following password entry window appears.
[ENTER PASSWORD]
2. Enter the password.

Press [↑][↓][←][→][NAV STATUS][DIM][DISP][ENT][MENU][NAV STATUS]
keys in sequence. The “FOR SERVICE” window appears.
[FOR SERVICE]
CH & PWR SETTINGS
TX TEST
RX TEST
I/O PORT TEST
ALARM HISTORY
I/O MONITOR : COM6
OTHER
3. Select “CH & PWR SETTINGS” and press [ENT] key.

The “CH & PWR SETTINGS” window appears.
[CH&PWR SETTINGS]
POWER : 12.5W
CH-NO. CH-A : 2087
CH-B : 2088
MODE : CH-A : TX/RX
CH-B : TX/RX
CH SET : AUTO
7-3
4. Set “POWER” and “CH-A” channels as follows. Then set “CH SET” to “MANUAL”
and press [MENU] key to return “FOR SERVICE” window.
Note:
- POWER ; Select TX output power for 0 W, 1 W 2 W or 12.5 W
- CH-NO. ; Valid only for CH-A data (invalid for CH-B)
- MODE ; Not related to the measurement for setting to “TX/RX” or ”UNUSED”
Set both CH-A and CH-B to “TX/RX”.
- CH SET ; Set to “MANUAL” for measurement.
When setting to “MANUAL”, channels and modes set in this window
for the regional operating area are used for operation.
Press [MENU] -> CHANNEL SETTINGS -> VIEW CHANNEL,
and then you can confirm the channel information in operation.
After measuring, you should return to “AUTO”.
Setting to TX TEST Mode

5. Select TX TEST in “FOR SERVICE” window, and press [ENT] key.
The “TX TEST” window appears.
[TX TEST]
PATTERN: TXF
TX START [DIM]
TX STOP [MENU]
6. Select “PATTERN” and press [ENT] key. Selection window of the modulating
signals appears. And select “TXF” and press [ENT] key.
Item Signal to be transmitted

PN PATTERN AIS signal modulated by random signal
TYPE 1 AIS signal modulated by 10101 signal
TYPE 2 AIS signal modulated by 0110011 signal
DSC 1 (Y) DSC signal modulated by Y signal
DSC 2 (B) DSC signal modulated by B signal
DSC 3 (BY) DSC signal modulated by B-Y signal
TXF Non-modulated signal
7-4
Measuring
7. Press [DIM] key to start the transmission.
“NOW TRANSMITTING STOP : MENU” indication is popped-up.
Press [MENU] key to stop the transmission.
“FINISHED TRANSMITTING PRESS ANY KEY” indication is popped-up.
Press [ENT] key to return to “TX TEST”.
Within 60 seconds, complete TX the frequency and TX output power measurement.

- Allowable power tolerance : within ± 20 % (for 1 W, 2 W and 12.5 W)
- Allowable frequency tolerance : within ± 3 ppm
8. After completion, press [MENU] key to return to “FOR SERVICE” window.

When confirming the other channel and output power, return to the step 3.
9. Select “CH & PWR SETTINGS” and press [ENT] key.
10. Put “POWER” and “CH-A” channels back to the previous settings and then “CH
SET” to “AUTO”. Press [MENU] key to go out of “FOR SERVICE” window.
11. Turn off the power and disconnect the measuring equipment, and then set to FA-150
back to its original operating condition.
7-5
7.2.2 Adjusting TX output power
Note:
When TX Power output with the antenna connected does not meet specifications,
confirm the TX Power with 50 ohm dummy loaded instead of the antenna to check
that the antenna condition is normal.
To adjust the power, turn “R133” on TX board until 12.5 W is obtained. There is no
way to adjust the 1 W and 2 W settings.
R133: PWR ADJ.

(12.5 W)
Y1:19.2 MHz
(TCXO)
Fig. 7.2.1 Output adjustment point for TX board
Fig. 7.2.1 TX board
7.2.3 Adjusting TX output frequency

Frequency adjustment is not necessary due to the use of TCXO. If the tolerance of the
TX frequency is found to exceed ± 3 ppm, replace the TX board.
TCXO is allocated as Y1 (19.2 MHz) on TX board. Refer to Fig. 7.2.1.
7-6
Chapter 8. Maintenance
8.1 ALARM STATUS
Introduction
First, turn ON the power switch of FA-1501 processor. Then, press the PWR key of
FA-1502 to turn the equipment on or off. When powered, the equipment emits a beep
and then proceeds in the sequence shown below.
AUTOMATIC
IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM
FURUNO ELECTRIC CORP.
[STARTUP TEST]
FA-1502 self-test begins.
PROGRAM No. : - Program: FA-1502 program No.
ROM
2450021-xx.--
: OK
- ROM: FA-1502 Flash ROM check
RAM : OK - RAM: FA-1502 RAM check
BACKUP DATA : OK
- BACKUP DATA: Flash ROM backup data is checked
for the proper state.
[ ]
NOW INITIALIZING:
HDG :_______ Shows that communications with FA-1501 processor is
NO OWN SHIP
SOG :_______kt
COG : ______
being established.
POSITION
CPA : ______nm
NOW INITIALIZING
AVAILABLE COMMUNICATION ERROR:
TCPA : ______
INTRD : __ Indicates that communications failed to be established
between FA-1501 and FA-1502.
NO OWN SHIP POSITION AVAILABLE:
Will be shown until the own ship position data is detected.
[ ]
HDG :_______
SOG :_______kt
COG : ______ Indication when the own ship position data is detected.
CPA : ______nm “ENTER MMSI!” is displayed in the event that no
TCPA : ______
INTRD : __ MMSI is registered.
[ FURUNO ]
HDG :111 Pressing [<], [>] keys display the target data.
SOG :; 10.0 kt
COG : 111.0
- Pressing the [>] key displays the target data nearest to
CPA 6.19 nm own ship.
TCPA : 12’50’’
INTRD : 1 - Pressing the [<] key displays the target data of the vessel
RNG : 6.0 nm DETAIL : [ENT] that is farthest from own ship.
1. The position message should be given within 2 minutes after the power is turned on.
The static data and navigational data are reported every 6 minutes and the reporting
interval of dynamic data varies in accord with the ship speed.
2. Unless MMSI is registered, report (transmission) does not begin. In addition, VDM
sentence is outputted but VDO sentence is not outputted.
3. Unless the ship’s position data is available, position without any position data is
reported and VDO and VDM sentences are output.
8-1
8.1 ALARM STATUS
8.1 ALARM STATUS

8.1.1 Alarm status: DISP -> ALARM STATUS
When alarms such as loss of position data, etc. are detected, their status is shown by
related popup displays and an alarm sound is output.
When the alarm state is removed, pressing any key of FA-1502, or turning ON ALM
ACK signal acknowledges the alarm. Then, the popup display disappears, alarm sound
output stops and the EXT ALM goes to the OFF state.
HDG ROT EPFS

L/L SOG COG
Related settings:
1. ON/OFF of ALARM BUZZER
The Alarm audio can be turned ON/OFF by the setting of [MENU] -> USER
SETTINGS -> ALARM BUZZER. However, EXT ALM is still output regardless of
its setting. See page 3-27.
2. EXT ALM output can be configured to be output by the setting of [MENU] -> FOR
SERVICE -> OTHER -> ALM MODE (CONTNUOUS and KEY STOP).
See page 3-22.
Pressing the [DISP] key several times to open the [ALARM STATUS] screen displays a
list of active alarms and their respective date and time (latest 25 cases). When the alarm
state is removed, the applicable alarm is automatically erased from the list.
In addition, these alarm messages are output in data format by utilizing the ALR
sentence. The ALR sentence is outputted every 25 seconds. If there is no alarm, the
ALR sentence content “Alarm is set to General Failure and alarm state is set to normal
range (V)” is outputted on every 2 minutes.
In addition to the [EXT ALM] output terminal, relay contact signals are also provided.
The maximum rating is 30 VDC/2 A, 125 VAC/0.5 A.
[ALARM STATUS]
ANT 16/JUL 6:30:20
EPFS 16/JUL 6:20:10
HDG 16/JUL 6:18:26
8-2
8.1 ALARM STATUS
EXT ALM
+5V EXT ALM #1 - #3 (Normal Open)
2 Power OFF
K1
G5V_1_5V 1 1. ALM A
Normal Open
5, 6 3. ALM C Powerr ON Power OFF
9
ALM 10 2. ALM B ALM ON ALM OFF
Q1, 2 Normal Close
4. ACK H
U11 +5V
TLP181_GR_TLP 5. ACK C
ALM ACK
ALM OFF:
- When the alarm state is removed
MOT - When any key of FA-1502 is pressed
(24P0036)
- When ALM ACK signal turn ON
Fig. 8.1.1 EXT ALM output circuit
Handling of Time:
The information on date and time used in the following items is based on the clock of
MAIN CPU. The clock is calibrated in order of ZDA sentence from internal “GPS” >
“MSG-11, MSG-4” > “position fixing time of RMC sentence input from external GPS”.
Calibration is carried out every time the time data is inputted.
- [MENU] -> DIAGNSTICS -> PWR ON/OFF HISTORY
- [MENU] -> DIAGNSTICS -> TX POWER HISTORY
- [MENU] -> DIAGNSTICS -> FOR SERVICE -> ALARM HISTORY
- [DISP] -> ALARM STATUS
Table 8.1.1 List of Alarms
ALM status
Description
indication
TX Tx malfunction Transmission failure. Transmission will stops.
Antenna VSWR trouble.
ANT Antenna VSWR is above limit
AIS continues operation.
Rx1 board (24P0033A) failure.
CH1 Rx channel 1 malfunction Transmission stop of corresponding
transmission channel
Rx2 board (24P0033B) failure.
CH2 Rx channel 2 malfunction Transmission stop of corresponding
transmission channel
DSC Rx board (24P0034) failure.
CH70 Rx channel 70 malfunction
AIS continues operation.
MKD connection lost MKD connection is lost, AIS continues operation.
MKD
(Minimum Keyboard and Display) (In actuality, this alarm can not be shown.)
External EPFS lost External navigator data is lost.
EPFS
(EPFS: Electronic position fixing system) AIS continues operation.
L/L No sensor position in use There is no position data to be used.
No valid SOG information SOG information from internal ad external GPS
SOG
(SOG: Speed Over Ground) is invalid data.
No valid COG information COG information from internal ad external GPS
COG
(COG: Course Over Ground) is invalid data.
HDG Heading lost/invalid HDG information data is lost/invalid.
No valid ROT information When HDG data and $TI-ROT data are
ROT
(ROT: Rate of Turn) unavailable.
FAIL System failure in general
8-3
8.1 ALARM STATUS
8.1.2 Alarm status analysis

1. TX (Tx malfunction)
This message is displayed when PLL circuit of TX board is UN-LOCK, when
transmission output drops or when transmission signal is detected though
MAIN CPU does not control transmission. The detection signal is “MONI”
signal of TX board.
When this message is given, no transmission is allowed if the PLL circuit is
UN-LOCK. Check the TX board if this alarm is shown.
2. ANT (Antenna VSWR exceeds limit)

This message is displayed when VSWR monitoring circuit detects VSWR 3 or
more. Transmission operation will continue. Detection signal is “R-VSWR” of
TX board. Check for antenna breakage, defective antenna cable, leakage from
coaxial cable, bad contact of antenna cable connector or other antenna line
trouble.
3. CH1 (Rx channel 1 malfunction)

“PLL UNLOCK” signal of PLL circuit of RX1 board is monitored. When this
signal is detected, transmission of corresponding channel: CH-A is stopped.
Check RX1 board if this alarm is shown.

“PLL UNLOCK” signal of PLL circuit of RX2 board is monitored. When this
signal is detected, transmission of corresponding channel: CH-B is stopped.
Check RX2 board if this alarm is shown.

This message is displayed when DSC message (Format specifier) is unable to
correctly decode a DSC message, even if DSC format signal or carrier signal is
received continuously for 90 seconds or more. Trouble of DSC RX board is
suspect.
Note:
For example, when DOT pattern signal transmitted by FM-8500 is
received for 90 seconds or more, this alarm is shown. This alarm continues
until the next DSC message is correctly received.
6. MKD (MKD connection lost)

This alarm indicates that a communication failure from FA-1502 to the FA-1501
has been detected. This check is carried out by PFEC data sentences, and
confirms connection every 15 seconds to ensure that the FA-1502 display is
connected. If the PFEC data response from the FA-1502 is not received, MKD
alarm occurs. Note that when a second FA-1502 is connected, no MKD error is
indicated if communication with the second FA-1502 takes place properly.
8-4
8.1 ALARM STATUS
Reference:
When COMMUNICATION ERROR is displayed;
This alarm occurs when the VDO sentence sent from the FA-1501 (every
second) is not received at the FA-1502.
PFEC(Command, Parameter)
PFEC(ACK)
FA-1501 FA-1502
VDO
VDM
VDO: Dynamic data and static data which FA-150 transmits are
sent to external listeners by this sentence.
VDM: Information about other ships received are sent to external
listeners by this sentence.
PFEC: Control commands and setting parameters are transferred by this
sentence.
7. EPFS (External EPFS lost)

This message is displayed when no position data is received from external
GNSS for 5 seconds or more, or when the data being received is invalid. The
input sentences which contain the position data are GNS, GLL, GGA and
RMC.
8. L/L (No sensor position in use)

This message is displayed when no position data is present from either external
GNSS or internal GPS, or both are found to be invalid. The input sentences
concerning the position data are GNS, GLL, GGA and RMC.
9. SOG (No valid SOG information)Note-1

This message is displayed when SOG data is not received or is invalid. The
sentences concerning SOG sentences are VBW, RMC, VTG and OSD.
10. COG (No valid COG information)Note-1

This message is displayed when COG data is not received or is invalid. The
sentences concerning COG sentences are VBW, RMC, VTG and OSD.
11. HDG (Heading lost/invalid)Note-2

This message is displayed when there is no heading data or the data is found
to be invalid. The sentences concerning heading are HDT, OSD and AD
format.
8-5
8.1 ALARM STATUS
12. ROT (No valid ROT information)

This message is displayed when there is no HDG data or $TI ROT data.
The data related to ROT display are:
1) Value of $TI ROT
2) Calculated value from heading sentences of HDT, OSD or AD format
- When ship is turned more than 10 degrees on the right (+5 deg/30 sec
or more); R>10.0
- When ship is turned more than 10 degrees on the left (+5 deg/30 sec
or more); L>10.0
- When ship is turned less than 10 degrees (within +5 deg/30 sec); 0.0
Note-1:
SOG and COG are taken from the same sentence. In addition, VBW (use of speed
over the ground) is not used unless heading (HDT, OSD) data is received. VBW is
handled as described in the table below.
Table 8.1.2 SOG/COG display processing
Input sentence
COG display SOG display
VBW HDT OSD RMC VTG
Calculated value of VBW
Yes Yes No No No VBW is displayed.
and HDT is displayed.
Calculated value of VBW
Yes No Yes No No VBW is displayed.
and HDT is displayed.
Displayed by priorities of Displayed by priorities of
Yes No No Yes Yes
RMC>VTG. RMC>VTG.
Yes No No No No Not displayed Not displayed
Note-2:
If the HDT talker is $HC, it is invalid. Choose talkers other than $HC, $HE or $HN.
When the AD format is used, set the AD-100 transmission interval to within 1
second.
8-6
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
8.2 SENSOR STATUS

8.2.1 Confirm sensor input currently in use
Press the [DISP] key until OWN DYNAMIC DATA display is shown. Position data,
SOG, COG, etc. The sensor status screen, which may be accessed by pressing [MENU]
-> SENSOR STATUS, will confirm whether external or internal sensors are actively
being used.
Table 8.2.1 List of SENSOR STATUS
Display Use state

UTC CLOCK LOST Internal GPS positioning failure
EXTRL DGNSS External DGNSS
EXTRL GNSS External GNSS
INTRL DGNSS BEACON Internal DGPS used (BEACON connected)
INTRL DGNSS MSG 17 Internal GNSS is differential-compensated by MSG17.
INTRL GNSS Internal GNSS
EXTRL SOG/COG SOG/COG from external GNSS
INTRL SOG/COG SOG/COG from internal GPS
HDT VALID HDT valid
ROT VALID ROT valid
In the event that value calculated from HDT or talker is ROT
OTHER ROT
other than $TI ROT.
Displayed when channel is changed in sea area operation
CH MANAGEMENT
(displayed for about 30 seconds).
8.2.2 Handling of sensors
1. Sentences required by AIS

Table 8.2.2 Sentences required by AIS
FA-150 processing IEC-61162
Priority order of sentence Required Optional
Datum Ref. DTM DTM
POS GNS> GLL> GGA>RMC GNS, GLL GGA, RMC
SOG VBW ＞RMC ＞VTG＞OSD VBW VTG, OSD, RMC
COG RMC＞VTG＞OSD RMC VTG, OSD
HDG HDT＞OSD＞AD FORMAT HDT OSD
$TI ROT>HDG (Calculated value from
ROT ROT
HDG)
RAIM GBS
8-7
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
2. Input/Output sentences for each MODE setting

Input/Output sentences control vary in accord with the MODE settings of COM1 to
COM6. See page 3-7 for the detail.
** [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET I/O PORT -> MODE **
3. Processing of sentences
AIS requires IEC-61162 Ed 2. (NMEA Ver-2.0 or higher) Processing key points are
described as follows. To use NMEA Ver.-1.5, see page 8-29.
1) Conditions which will result in an invalid sentence include the following:
- When checksum is abnormal.
- When NULL code is included in position data.
- When N/S of position data exceeds 90 degrees or W/E exceeds 180 degrees.
- When azimuth bearing data is other than 0 to 359 degrees.
- When ship speed data is other than 0.0 to 99.99 knots.
- When reception error occurs in sentence.
2) Priority processing of sentence
Table 8.2.3 Priority processing of sentence
GNS > GLL (with Mode IND) > GGA > RMC (with Mode IND) > GLL (with no
Mode IND) > RMC (with no Mode IND)
Pos.
Note: GLL, RMC
NMEA Ver.-1.5: with no Mode IND / NMEA Ver.-2.0 or higher: with Mode IND
SOG, COG VBW > RMC > VTG > OSD
HDG HDT > OSD
RAIM GBS
ROT ROT
3) Each sentence input interval is times out after 5 seconds. Set the output sentence
interval from external GNSS to less than 5 seconds.
4) External sentences are not allowed unless they contain checksum data. In addition,
the data is not allowed if the checksum is erroneous.
5) If any sentence includes both valid and invalid, the entire sentence will be ignored
/ not allowed.
6) Processing of Mode Indicator
RMC, GLL, etc., contain a Mode Indicator, and AIS is operated in accordance with
information such as Autonomous, Differential, Dead reckoning, Data not valid, etc.
For example, in the case of Autonomous (Normal) mode and Position accuracy
information contained in Msg. 1 to Msg.3 is “Low” and differential, “High”
information is sent.
In the case of mode other than autonomous and differential mode, the data is not
used. In FA-150, if any sentence with no Mode Indicator is received, it is processed
as the Autonomous mode (Normal).
When a sentence with Mode Indicator attached is received, if the mode is other than
Autonomous or Differential, the data is not used and FA-150 processes as error.
8-8
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
7) Sensor input change over time

Change over from higher priority to lower priority of (D)GNSS sensor input takes
place in 5 seconds. Change over from lower priority to higher priority takes place
in 30 seconds.
The priority order is:
External DGNSS > internal DGPS MSG.17 > internal DGPS BEACON >
external GNSS > internal GPS
There is no priority order for talker name. HDT and ROT are displayed when the
sentences are received.
8) Processing of DTM sentence
In the AIS system, reference datum: WGS-84 is used for DTM sentence. Output
DTM: WGS-84 for setting of GNSS output sentence.
If DTM sentence is not received, the position data is processed as WGS84 and
transmitted.
Table 8.2.4 Handling of DTM sentence
Local Datum Reference Datum Transmission of position data Display of position data
Anything is
WGS84 Transmitted Displayed
acceptable.
Anything is Offset is calculated and Offset is calculated and
WGS84
acceptable. transmitted. transmitted.
181°/91° is transmitted as
Other than the above Invalid: --
invalid data.
8-9
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
9) Processing of SOG and COG

SOG and COG are taken from the same sentence. VBW (use of speed over the ground)
is not used unless heading (HDT, OSD) data are received. VBW is handled as
described in the table below.
Table 8.2.5 Processing of SOG/COG
Input sentence
COG display SOG is displayed.
VBW HDT OSD RMC VTG
Calculation values of VBW and
Yes Yes No No No VBW is displayed.
HDT are displayed.
Calculation values of VBW and
Yes No Yes No No VBW is displayed.
HDT are displayed.
Displayed in priority order of Displayed in order of
Yes No No Yes Yes
RMC>VTG. RMC>VTG.
Yes No No No No Not displayed. Not displayed.
10) Processing of ROT sentence

The AIS automatically selects the ROT source with the highest priority available:
$TI ROT (Rate of Turn Indicator) > Other ROT source.
Other ROT source data is based on HDT, OSD or AD format information. When
other data source is in use, the contents of the ROT field in the AIS data is given in
the table below.
Table 8.2.6 Processing of ROT
Change of ROT Display of ROT data Data of transmitted message

Change greater than ±5 deg/30 sec. R(L) > 10.0 deg/min +127 deg/min
Change within ±5 deg/30 sec. 0.0 deg/min 0.0 deg/min
8-10
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
Table 8.2.7 Table showing sentence status if checksum is received or not received
(NMEA Ver. 1.5, 2.0)
Check- Valid/
Sentence Note
sum Invalid
DTM Reference Sentence is not defined.
GNS Sentence is not defined.
GLL No No
Position
GGA No Yes
RMC Yes Yes
VBW Sentence is not defined.
VTG No No
SOG
NMEA OSD Sentence is not defined.
Ver-1.5 RMC Yes Yes
RMC Yes Yes
VTG COG No No
OSD Sentence is not defined.
HDT Heading No No
OSD Sentence is not defined.
ROT Rate of tune Sentence is not defined.
DTM Reference Yes No
GNS Sentence is not defined.
GLL Yes Yes
Position
GGA Yes Yes
RMC Yes Yes Checksum is mandatory.
VBW Yes Yes
VTG SOG Yes Yes
NMEA OSD Yes No
Ver-2.0 RMC Yes Yes Checksum is mandatory.
RMC Yes Yes Checksum is mandatory.
VTG COG Yes Yes
OSD Yes No
HDT Yes No
Heading Valid/Invalid data is present in
OSD Yes Yes
Heading status.
ROT Rate of tune Yes Yes
8-11
8.2 SENSOR STATUS
Table 8.2.8 Table showing sentence status if checksum is received or not received
(NMEA Ver. 3.0)
Check- Valid/
Sentence Note
sum Invalid
DTM Reference Yes No
GNS Yes Yes
GLL Yes Yes
Position
GGA Yes Yes
RMC Yes Yes
VBW Yes Yes
IEC61162-
VTG SOG Yes Yes
Ed2)
OSD Yes No
||
RMC Yes Yes
NMEA
Ver-3.0 RMC Yes Yes
VTG COG Yes Yes
OSD Yes Yes
HDT Yes No
Heading Valid/Invalid data is present
OSD Yes YesNote)
in Heading status.
ROT Rate of tune Yes Yes
Note:
- Italic characters in the Sentence column are sentences required for AIS. Others are
optional.
- With NMEA version 2.0, the check-sum of RMC sentence is mandatory.
The check-sum of the other sentences is not mandatory.
Note that some models (GP-30 series) are not provided with the check-sum.
8-12
8.3 INTERNAL GPS
8.3 INTERNAL GPS

The data derived from the built-in GPS (GN-8093) can be confirmed.
This GPS is DGPS capable, and is compatible with the RTCM-SC-104 DGPS
correction protocol.
- Received signal: L1 (1575.42 MHz, C/A Code)
- Maximum number of tracking satellites is GPS 12ch + WAAS 2ch.
- Position update time: 1 second
- External serial communication: Asynchronous serial communication (4800 bps)
- Output data format: NMEA Ver. 2.30-compliant
Data related to position are transmitted in GPGSA, GPGBS, GPZDA, and GPRMC
sentences.
- Time to first fix: Hot start; 9 seconds (typ), Warm start; 36 seconds (typ)
Cold start; 43 seconds (typ)
Reference:
The built-in GPS test can be carried out by [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS ->
TRANSPONDER TEST -> GPS TEST.
[INTERNAL GPS]
LAT : 34°44.4635’N
LON : 135°21.2683’E
SOG : 0.0kt COG : 220.0°
UTC : 27/JUL/2005
10:52:20
GPS STS : 3D
PA: L RAIM : USE
Table 8.3.1 Display content of INTERNAL GPS
Item Description
Pos., SOG/COG, Pos., SOG/COG:GPRMC data is displayed.
Date Date: GPZDA data is displayed.
- 2D: two-dimensional positioning, 3D: three-dimensional positioning
- D2D: two-dimensional positioning by differential GPS
STS (Status) - D3D: three-dimensional positioning by differential GPS
- NO FIX: not positioning
- DOP: when HDOP value exceeds 4 at 2D and 6 at 3D
Differential GPS
- H: Positioning accuracy is within 15 m.
PA (Position - L: Positioning accuracy is 15 m or higher.
Accuracy) Normal GPS
- H: Positioning accuracy is within 5 m.
- L: Positioning accuracy is 5 m or higher.
RAIM (Receiver
Autonomous USE: when there is GBS sentence (in nomaly, USE is displayed).
Integrate Monitor)
8-13
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
Choosing [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS and pressing the [ENT] key displays the menu
below. In this section, description of FOR SERVICE is excluded.
[DIAGNOSTICS]
MONITOR TEST
TRANSPONDER TEST
PWR ON/OFF HISTRY
TX ON/OFF HISTRY
MEMORY CLEAR
FOR SERVICE
8.4.1 MONITOR TEST

Choosing MONITOR TEST and pressing the [ENT] key will automatically start the
monitor test. When this test is finished, “QUIT [MENU] 3 TIMES” message will be
shown. (Press the [MENU] key three times to exit the test.)
Self test Part-1)

Pressing the key while “PUSH KEY” is being displayed shows the key OK indication in
the KEY column. Pressing the [!] key moves the cursor “UP” and the ["] key
“DOWN.” If no key is pressed, the process moves to Self test Part -2 after about 5
seconds.
[MONITOR TEST]
BOOT NO. : 2450020-01.0x
PRG NO. : 2450021-01.0x
ROM : CONT :
SDRAM : DIM :
PORT :
KEY : PUSH KEY
QUIT [MENU] 3 TIMES
8-14
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
Self test Part -2)

RAM, SDRAM and PORT are checked. OK or NG indications are shown, and when
this test is completed, the self-test process automatically advances to the next step.
- PORT: Loop back (transmission and reception) test of a serial data line. If testing
just the display without a processor unit connected, connect between TD-A
and RD-A, and between TD-B and RD-B of the display with jumper wires.
If the processor unit is connected, no jumpers are required. A specific
character string will be sent / looped back during this test. If it is received,
the PORT is considered OK.
- ROM: A total sum from the beginning to the last of ROM is calculated. If it
coincides with the checksum written at the last ROM, it is judged OK.
- RAM: Specific data is written in a specific area of RAM and the ability to read it is
checked. If this WRITE / READ functionality check is confirmed, RAM is
considered OK.
Self test Part -3)

The LCD contrast is changed in three stages (48, 32, 56). Then the LCD and key
dimmers are changed in four stages (4, 1, 3). When this test is finished, the process
automatically advances to the next step.
[MONITOR TEST]
BOOT NO. : 2450020-01.0x
PRG NO. : 2450021-01.0x
ROM : CONT : x
SDRAM : DIM : x
PORT :
KEY :
Self test Part-4)

This process checks the LCD. During this test, all the LCDs are turned ON for 2
seconds (maximum contrast.). Then, all the LCDs are turned OFF (minimum contrast)
for 3 seconds. When this test is finished, the process automatically returns to Self test
Part-1.
<LCD CHECK>
ALL ON 2 SEC.
ALL OFF 3 SEC.
8-15
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
8.4.2 TRANSPONDER TEST

FA-1501 memory test and built-in GPS test are carried out.
1. MEMORY TEST
[MEMORY TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
2450018-01.0x
MAIN ROM : OK
MAIN RAM : OK
SUB RAM : OK
- PROGRAM NO.: FA-1501 program number is displayed.

- MAIN ROM: This is to check FLASH RAM (U25) for MAIN CPU of MAIN
board. OK or NG is displayed by the result of the Check-sum check
of ROM.
- MAIN RAM : This is to check RAM (U24) for MAIN CPU of MAIN board. OK or
NG is displayed by the result of the Read/Write.
- SUB RAM : This is to check RAM (U2 and U8) for SUB CPU of MAIN board.
OK or NG is displayed by the result of the Read/Write.
2. GPS TEST
When this test is executed, the command to start the self test is sent from FA-1501 to
built-in GPS receiver, and the test begins. The test results are displayed.
[GPS TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
4850264005
TEST: OK/NG
(NG List)
When NG is displayed, the content of NG includes the following:

- ROM ERROR;
When ROM error is found in GPS core board (GN 8093).
- RAM ERROR;
When RAM error is found in GPS core board (GN 8093).
- ANT ERROR;
Current that flows in GPS ANT is checked. If the current is not within the
specified tolerances, ERROR is displayed.
8-16
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
- DATA BACKUP ERROR;

This error is shown when there is no backup data of GPS data and WAAS data of
GPS core board (GN 8093).
- PARAMETER BACKUP ERROR;
This error is shown when there is no backup data of receiver parameters of GPS
core board (GN 8093).
- GPS COMMUNICATION ERROR;
This error is shown when there is no response from GPS core board (GN 8093).
Note:
When DATA BACKUP ERROR or PARAMETER BACKUP ERROR is displayed,
electric charge of backup capacitor (C312: 1F) of MAIN board is empty.
The backup time of this capacitor is about 1 week.
8.4.3 PWR ON/OFF HISTORY

The PWR ON/OFF HISTORY log shows the date and time of the latest 30 power-ons
and power-offs. If the interval between power-off and power-on is less than 15 minutes
those times are not shown.
[PWR ON/OFF HISTORY]

PWR-ON dd/mm/yyyy
Time
PWR-OFF dd/mm/yyyy
Time
Reference: A. 917 excerpt: Operation of the transceiver unit

21; AIS should always be in operation when ships are underway or at anchor. If the
master believes that the continual operation of AIS might compromise the safety
or security of his/her ship, the AIS may be switched off. This might be the case
in sea areas where pirates and armed robbers are known to operate. Actions of
this nature should always be recorded in the ship’s logbook together with the
reason for doing so. The master should restart the AIS as soon as the source of
danger has been removed. If the AIS is shut down, static data and voyage related
information remains stored. Restart is done by switching on the power to the AIS
unit. Ship’s own data will be transmitted after a two minute initialization period.
In ports AIS operation should be in accordance with port requirements when in
port.
8-17
8.4 DIAGNOSTICS
8.4.4 TX ON/OFF HISTORY

The TX ON/OFF HISTORY log shows the date and time of the latest 30 transmissions.
The conditions of transmission stop to be stored include the following:
- When POWER is set to 0 W or MODE of CH-A and CH-B is set to RX in [MENU]
-> DIAGNOSTICS -> FOR SERVICE -> CH & PWR SETTINGS.
- When POWER is set to 0 W or MODE of CH-A and CH-B is set to RX in [MENU]
-> CHANNEL SETTINGS -> EDIT CHANNEL.
[TX ON/OFF HISTORY]

TX-ON dd/mm/yyyy
Time
TX-OFF dd/mm/yyyy
Time
8.4.5 MEMORY CLEAR

The memory contents may be cleared (separately) as shown below:
[MEMORY CLEAR]
MONITOR CLEAR
SET USER DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE?
GPS COLD START
YES NO
- MONITOR CLEAR;
[MENU] -> USER SETTINGS is cleared with exception of LR MODE.
- SET USER DEFAULT;
[MENU] -> USER SETTINGS is cleared and [NAV STATUS] is cleared.
- GPS COLD START;
Built-in GPS receiver begins cold start.
Reference:
To clear all the settings, execute [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS -> FOR SERVICE ->
OTHER -> ALL CLEAR. See page 8-25.
8-18
8.5 FOR SERVICE
8.5 FOR SERVICE

Password is required to enter this menu.
[FOR SERVICE]
CH & PWR SETTINGS
Password entry: Order of key entries
TX TEST
RX TEST [UP], [DOWN], [LEFT], [RIGHT],
I/O PORT TEST
[NAV STATUS], [DIM], [DISP],
ALRM HISTORY
I/O MONITOR [ENT], [MENU], [NAV STATUS]
OTHER
8.5.1 CH & PWR SETTINGS

When CH SET is set to MAUAL, AIS operating channels and output power can be set
manually. The channels that are able to set up are international channels.
If CH SET is set to MANUAL, even when the ship enters the Regional operating area
by AIS message: MSG22, etc., the ship is operated by the value set in this part of the
section.
** Keep the CH SET setting to AUTO. **
[CH & PWR SETTINGS]

POWER : 12.5W - Power : 0 W, 1 W, 2 W, 12.5 W
CH NO. CH-A : 2087 - CH No. : International channel
CH-B : 2088 - Mode : Tx/Rx, Rx, Unused
MODE CH-A : TX/RX - CH SET: Auto/Manual
CH-B : TX/RX
CH SET : AUTO
Reference:
Channels in operation and output power can be confirmed by [MENU] ->
CHANNEL SETTINGS -> VIEW CHANNEL.
[VIEW CHANNEL]
POWER : 1W
CHANNEL NO.
CH-A : 1001
CH-B : 1003 (MANUAL)
(MANUAL) This is displayed when CH SET is set manually in CH
QUIT [MENU] & PWR SETTINGS. Setting takes place automatically
if this display is not present.
8-19
8.5 FOR SERVICE
8.5.2 TX TEST
This is a menu used when output power is measured.
See Chapter 7 Measurement.
[TX TEST]
PATTERN: PN_PATTERN
TX START [DIM]
TX STOP [MENU]
8.5.3 RX TEST
When this test is carried out, remove the antenna so that noise does not input from the
outside. This test is a loop back test and is carried out in the channel currently set.
A specific test message is transmitted several times and if more than one half the signal
transmissions can be detected, the board is judged OK, and if NG, the board is judged
trouble.
The test message content is:
- RX1 and 2 : MSG-1 (transmitted 12 times)
- DSC : Position message to own ship (transmitted 5 times).
The test signals are received by PA turned OFF and leakage from the Driver circuit
which is received by RX1, RX2 and DSC boards. “Leakage” is carried out through the
coaxial connector of J1: RX RF line. The leakage signal level is about -96 dBm in terms
of antenna input.
[RX TEST]
RX1 : OK
RX2 : OK
DSC : OK
8-20
8.5 FOR SERVICE
8.5.4 I/O PORT TEST

This is a loop back test of the I/O port.
When this test is performed, ports that are to be tested should be connected with
jumpers in accordance with the table below. Note that the MODE setting in SET I/O
PORT menu does not matter when this test is being done, and the test will be carried out
based on the current I/O port SPEED seting. The test results are OK if a specific
sentence is transmitted and the I/O port can receive that same sentence.
[I/O PORT TEST]

IEC PORT TEST - IEC PORT TEST: COM1 to COM6, PC
NMEA PORT TEST - NMEA PORT TEST: COM4 to COM6
AD-10 PORT TEST - AD-10 PORT TEST: AD-10
Table 8.5.1 IEC port test
IEC PORT TEST: Port Pins to be Jumpered

COM1 COM 1 1:TDA – 4: RDA, 2:TDB – 5: RDB
PC PC 2:SD – 3:RD
Table 8.5.2 NMEA port test
NMEA PORT TEST Port Pins to be Jumpered

COM6 COM 6 1:TDA – 9: RDA, 2:TDB – 11: AD DAD-C
Table 8.5.3 AD-10 port test
AD-10 PORT TEST Port Pins to be Jumpered

COM 5 COM 5-#1:TDA – COM 6-#12: AD CLK –H
COM 6 COM 5-#2:TDB – COM 6-#13: AD CLK –C
AD-10
1:TDA – 10: AD DATA-H
COM 6
2:TDB – 11: AD DATA-C
8-21
8.5 FOR SERVICE
8.5.5 ALARM HISTORY

When alarms occurred, the date and time which they occurred are shown.
A maximum of 25 alarm incidents are stored in memory. This data is stored even if the
power supply is turned off.
[ALARM HISTORY]
ANT 25/JUN 06:38:19
TX 25/JUN 06:38:19
PAGE(1/5): [<>] QUIT [MENU]
Reference:
Pressing the [DISP] key several times to open the [ALARM STATUS] screen
displays the alarm which are currently active.
[ALARM STATUS]
ANT 25/JUN 06:38:19
TX 25/JUN 06:38:19
PAGE(1/5): [<>] QUIT [MENU]
8.5.6 I/O MONITOR

I/O MONITOR displays input data of any specific I/O port.
Only upper-case ASCII characters are shown, and all other characters appear blanked /
black. Pressing the [ENT] key refreshes the data display.
For example, in the event that the SPEED setting in SET I/O PORT menu does not
coincide with the data speed of a device connected, (GPS, for example,) character
strings with no meaning are displayed.
[PC MONITOR] Screen is updated

COM1 COM5 !AIVDM, 1, 1, , B, 15`9CT
COM2 COM6 by [ENT].
002I9 2 C JVBW JT00
COM3 PC SH, 0*15 $PFEC, AI
COM4 GPS , 0, 13, 3, 0*6F $PFEC,
[ENT]
AI ,0, 30, F, 8, D, #*6
4 SPFEC, AI , 30, D,
3*06 $PFEC, , R,
8-22
8.5 FOR SERVICE
8.5.7 OTHER
1. SIM MODE
This is a simulator mode.
External GNSS data, internal GPS data and heading data are not required.
Simulation “1” displays simulated targets of 9 ships in the Tokyo Bay area, while
simulation “2” displays simulation targets of 5 ships in the Osaka Bay area. In addition,
the simulation-related data: VDM and VDO sentences related to the simulation are
outputted to the outside in the same as normal operation. For MMSI, IMO NO, ANT
POS and other static data and navigation data, set values are used. The simulated
position data appears as if it were being fed by a GPS in each of the simulated areas.
When AIS enters the simulator mode, “S” is displayed at the top right end of all the
screens. This mode is maintained even if the power supply is turned off.
Fig. 8.5.1 Location of ships in the simulator mode
8-23
8.5 FOR SERVICE
Table 8.5.4 Own ship data in the simulator mode
Own Dynamic Data 1: Tokyo Bay 2: Osaka Bay

DATE Present date/time Present date/time
LAT 35°12.410’N 34°31.000’N
LON 139°43.458’E 135°04.000’E
SOG 0.0 kt 8.0 kt
COG 270.0° 90°
ROT 0.0°/min 0.0°/min
HDG 270.0° 90°
PA H H
GPS EXT DGPS EXT DGPS
RAIM UNUSE UNUSE
Table 8.5.5 Other ship data in the simulator mode

Target 1: Tokyo Bay 2: Osaka Bay
MMSI
Name Default of Pos. SOG Default of Pos. SOG
35°05.146N 15, 12, 8, 5, 4 kt 34°30.000N
DEM0 999999000 8.0 kt
139°38.996E Variable 135°16.000E
28, 8, 10, 12, 8,
35°24.319N 34°34.567N
DEM1 999999001 3, 6, 8 kt 8.0 kt
139°40.447E 135°04.000E
Variable
35°00.948N 6, 5, 7, 8, 6, 4 kt 34°29.567N
DEM2 999999002 16.0 kt
139°48.116E Variable 135°04.000E
35°10.408N 12, 10, 1, 3, 7, 34°34.567N
DEM3 999999003 12.0 kt
139°47.138E 8 kt Variable 135°10.110E
35°47.279N 16, 12, 10, 8, 34°32.621N
DEM4 999999004 0.0 kt
139°40.195E 5 kt Variable 135°07.1790E
35°08.593N 15, 12, 8, 5, 4,
DEM5 999999005
139°46.916E 15 kt Variable
35°12.755N 12, 8, 5, 4,
DEM6 999999006
35°14.497N 8, 7, 6, 5, 2, 4,
DEM7 999999007
35°10.747N 7, 6, 5, 2, 4, 5,
DEM8 999999008
8-24
8.5 FOR SERVICE
2. ALARM MODE
See Page 3-22.
3. CH MODE
See Page 3-23.
4. ALL CLEAR
All the settings return to default values.
ALL CLEAR. Choose YES and press the [ENT] key.

During initialization, the following display is popped up.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO NOW INITIALIZING
TRANSPONDER xx%
Reference:
In [MENU] -> DIAGNOSTICS -> MEMORY CLEAR, the following memory may
be cleared:
- MONITOR CLEAR;
[MENU] -> USER SETTINGS clear and LR MODE are excluded.
- SET USER DEFAULT;
[MENU] -> USER SETTINGS clear and [NAV STATUS] clear.
5. DEBUG MENU
CPU VERSION
Each number display of MAIN, SUB and FPGA are control number of R&D.
The released program and control No. are linked.
[CPU VERSION]
2450018-01.0x
MAIN : 01.01.B1
200507061623
SUB : 01.01
200504151523
FPGA : 01.0F
000000000000
Reference:
Normally, the program version can be confirmed by [MENU] ->
DIAGNOSTICS -> MONITOR TEST and TRANSPONDER TEST.
8-25
8.5 FOR SERVICE
A/D MONITOR
With this test, the output power condition and antenna status can be confirmed.
The displayed content is MONI voltage value (VF) and R-VSWR voltage value (VR),
and settings of output power.
However, VF and VR value are shown the highest level value within every second. For
example, if 12.5 W output is set and transmission is not carried out, VF is 21 and VR is
39 but when transmission is carried out, VF is raised to 241 and VR to 58.
VF and VR are varied in accord with the antenna condition. VF and VR (in the table
below) are threshold values when “TX” and “ANT” errors are detected.
Table 8.5.6 VF and VR threshold values
Output VR value VF value REF

1W 62 50 76
2W 75 70 90
12.5 W 137 149 172
TX error conditions
- When the VF value is lower than the threshold value of the table below.
- When the VF value is greater than the threshold value of the table below when
transmission is not carried out.
- When TX PLL is UN-LOCK.
ANT error conditions
When the ANT value is higher than the VR value of the table below.
Note:
When ANT error occurs, TX error occurs, too.
Table 8.5.7 Measured examples of VF and VR

ANT-terminal
ANT 50 ohm ANT-terminal open
short-circuited
Power
VR value VF value VR value VF value VR value VF value
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
0W 39 - 21 - 39 - 21 - 39 - 21 -
1W 39 43 25 76 39 85 24 41 39 78 24 71
2W 39 45 21 95 39 97 21 52 39 103 21 94
12.5 W 39 57 21 242 39 206 21 98 39 205 21 207
8-26
8.5 FOR SERVICE
SS/SN MONITOR
Generally, SS is calculated and displayed. When SW2 of the MAIN board set as
follows; SW2-#1: ON, SW2-#2, 3, 4: OFF, S/N is calculated and displayed.
SS/SN MONITOR indicates the intensity of SS (Signal Strings) signal and S/N
(Signal/Noise), but under the normal operating condition, it is unable to judge whether
the reception circuit is good or bad from this numerical value.
When the sensitivity of reception circuit is checked, that is, when the SS/SN value is
measured, connect Standard Signal Generator to the antenna terminal and input carrier
signals (non-modulation signal).
80 RX1(160.625MHz)
70
60
50
40
SN
30
SS/SN
20
SS
10
0
-130 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20
RF INPUT (dBm)
80 DSC(156.525MHz)
70
60
50
40
30
SN
SS/SN
20
10 SS
0
-130 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20
RF INPUT (dBm)
Fig. 8.5.2 SS/SN input to output
8-27
8.5 FOR SERVICE
The following settings, SILENT and CHECKSUM are

special-mode settings. Never disclose the setting password to
the user!!
6. SILENT MENU
1. Calling up the SILENT menu.
To enter this menu, turn ON the power while pressing [MENU] and [ENT] key. Then
the password entry screen appears. Enter the password same as for FOR SERVICE
menu. See page 8-19.
[OTHER]
SIM MODE : OFF
ALARM MODE : KEY STOP
CH MODE : INT
ALL CLEAR
DEBUG MENU
SILENT MENU : OFF
CHECK SUM : CHECK
Add
2. Set SILENT MENU to ON.

When SILENT MENU is set to ON, “CLASS A MODE,” “RX ONLY MODE” or
“RESTRICTED,” which indicates SILENT MODE, appears on the lower right of the
plotter screen or the [MENU] screen.
SILENT MODE holds this function even if the power supply is turned off.
[MENU] RX ONLY MODE MODE which is set is displayed.

MSG - CLASS A MODE
SENSOR STATUS - RX ONLY MODE
INTERNAL GPS - RESTRICTED
USER SETTINGS
INITIAL SETTINGS
CHENNEL SETTIONGS
DIAGNOSTICS
8-28
8.5 FOR SERVICE
3. Change over to SILENT MODE.

To change over, pressing the [DIM] key. SILENT MODE can be switched from any
screen. When the SELECT MODE popup is displayed, press the key that
corresponds to the MODE to be set.
SELECT MODE
[DISP] : CLASS A MODE
[DIM] [ENT] : RX ONLY MODE
[DIM] : RESTRICTED
- CLASS A MODE:
Transmission and reception modes are enabled and normal AIS function (class
A) is executed.
- RX ONLY MODE:
Mode dedicated to reception.
- RESTRICTED:
Reception, and MSG-6 (Binary Address Message) and MSG-8 (Binary
Broadcast Message) only are allowed to be transmitted.
4. Set SILENT MENU to OFF.

Call the SILENT MENU again and set SILENT MENU to OFF.
7. CHECK SUM
The same method to call up the SILENT MENU in the previous page is used to enter
this menu.
Even if the power supply is turned off, CHECKSUM settings are kept. To turn OFF this
function, call up the CHECKSUM menu again and turn off the settings.
- CHECKSUM: CHECK
The checksum field of input sentence is checked.
- CHECKSUM: UNCHECK
The checksum field of input sentence is not checked. Even NMEA Ver 1.5
sentence can be accepted.
AIS requires IEC61162 sentence. When CHECKSUM is set to UNCHECK,

it does not conform to the AIS regulations, to which care must be taken.
8-29
8.6 ＬＥＤ
8.6 LED
8.6.1 MAIN board
CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4

図 8.5.2 SS/SN 入対出力
Fig. 8.6.1 MAIN substrate LED
CR11, CR12, CR13, CR14
Table 8.6.1 MAIN board LED
LED Description
CR1 Goes on when AIS signal is detected with RX1 board.
CR2 Goes on when AIS signal is detected with RX2 board.
For R&D
Displays demodulation method of received signal of RX1 substrate (frequency
CR3
demodulation, synchronous detection)
Goes on in the case of frequency demodulation.
For R&D
Displays demodulation method of received signal of RX2 board (frequency
CR4
demodulation, synchronous detection)
Goes on in the case of frequency demodulation.
LED for MAIN CPU
- Blinks every 200 msec when the device operates in synchronism with GPS.
CR11
- Blinks every second when the device operates in synch with anything other than
GPS (other ship, VTS).
CR12 LED for MAIN CPU: goes on every TDMA slot timing.
LED for FPGA: goes on every TDMA slot timing.
CR13
(FPGA controls MAIN CPU.)
CR14 LED for FPGA: blinks when DSC signal processing is in operation.
8-30
8.6 ＬＥＤ
8.6.2 TX board
TX monitor detects output power of TX board (MONI signal) and TX board LED goes
on in synch with output power. It goes on when the output power is about 0.5 W or
more.
LED：CR6
(TX monitor)
Fig. 8.6.2 TX substrate LED
Reference:
When transmission is made, the OWN DYNAMIC DATA antenna mark blinks.
Leakage from PA board is detected by RX1 and RX2. “Leakage” is conducted
through coaxial connector of the J1: RXRF line of the PA board.
[OWN DYNAMIC DATA] - Antenna mark is indicated:

22/JUN/2005 06:43:20 It indicates that the antenna is synchronous
LAT : 34 27.8412’N with UTC of built-in GPS. When external GPS
LON : 135 25.1232’E is being used, no antenna mark is displayed.
COG : 57.0 HDG : 123 - Antenna mark indication blinks:
ROT : R10.0 /min It indicates that message is being transmitted.
PA : H RAIM : USE
8-31
8.7 DIP Switch Settings
8.7 DIP Switch Settings

8.7.1 MAIN board
S2
Fig. 8.7.1 MAIN substrate DIP switch
Table 8.7.1 SW2 function

SW 2
Function
#4 #3 #2 #1
OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal mode
RX adjustment/inspection mode
OFF OFF OFF ON #1-ON: SS, S/N MONITOR of DEBUG menu is displayed.
#1-OFF: SS MONITOR of DEBUG menu is displayed.
Slot No. is added to VDO, VDM sentences.
OFF OFF ON OFF
Used when log is collected.
For R&D
OFF OFF ON ON
Under regular mode, PC port is operated at 57.6 kbps.
For R&D
OFF ON OFF OFF
DSC adjustment/inspection mode
OFF ON OFF ON Not used
OFF ON ON OFF Not used
All clear
OFF ON ON ON All clear is carried out every time for turning ON the power
supply.
ON N/A N/A N/A Not used
8-32
8.8 Popup message list
Table 8.8.1 List of popup messages
Popup display Display conditions
TX Transmission failure, transmission stop

Antenna VSWR trouble
ANT
(the AIS unit continues operation.)
CH1 Failure of TDMA RX1 board
CH2 Failure of TDMA RX2 board
CH70 Failure of DSC TX board
FAIL System failure in general
EPFS Disconnection of external GNSS
L/L No L/L data to use
SOG No SOG information
COG No COG information
HDG No HDG information
ROT No ROT information
COLLISION ALARM CPA/TCPA alarm is initiated.
TRANSPONDER WAS REBOOTED. Transponder is rebooted.
COMMUNICATION ERROR Communication with transponder is stopped.
MKD MKD input device is lost.
ENTER MMSI ! MMSI is not entered.
NOW INITIALIZING Initializing when power supply is turned on.
NOW INITIALIZING
Screen on which ALL CLEAR is being carried out.
TRANSPONDER.xxx%
NOW TRANSMITTING
In transmission
STOP: [MENU]
FINISHED
TRANSMITTING When transmission is finished.
PRESS ANY KEY
SELECT MODE
[DISP]:CLASS A MODE Screen to choose operating mode with [DIM] key held
[ENT] :RX ONLY MODE depressed when the mode is set to SILENT MODE.
[DIM] :RESTRICTED
[RAIM/PA]
DATA CHANGED. When RAIM/PA is changed.
PRESS ANY KEY
CAN'T DISPLAY
OVER LAT85 ﾟ In the PLOT screen, latitude exceeds 85 degrees.
PRESS ANY KEY
MESSAGE !
When message arrives.
PRESS ANY KEY
8-33
[LR RESPONSE]
MMSI:xxxxxxxxx
NAME:xxxxxxxxxx
Long-range automatic response screen
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
PRESS ANY KEY
[RECEIVED LR]
MMSI:xxxxxxxxx
NAME:xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Long-range manual response screen
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
RESPONSE?
YES:[ENT] NO:OTHER
NOW SENDING. Message is being transmitted.
NOW WAITING
RESPONSE. Message is being waited to receive.
PRESS ANY KEY
SEND MESSAGE
UNSUCCESSFUL. Transmission failure (Broadcast)
PRESS ANY KEY
SEND MESSAGE
UNSUCCESSFUL.
Transmission failure (Individual calling)
MMSI:xxxxxxxxx
PRESS ANY KEY
SEND MESSAGE
COMPLETE.
Transmission completed (Individual calling)
MMSI:xxxxxxxxx
PRESS ANY KEY
SEND MESSAGE
COMPLETE. Transmission completed (Broadcast)
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
INVALID MMSI MMSI entry error
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
INVALID CHANNEL Channel designation error
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
INVALID L/L (x) Lat/Lon entry error
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
L/L SIZE ERROR No region designation or region size error
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
PRIORITY ERROR Region priority error
PRESS ANY KEY
[ERROR REGIST]
NOT 8 MILE AWAY
8-mile error
FROM THE CORNER
PRESS ANY KEY
8-34
[PARAMETER ERROR]
SENTENCE NO.: xxx
Communication error between BB and MKD
KIND: FORMAT
**BB: FA-1501, MKD: FA-1502 **
FIELD NO.: xx
PRESS ANY KEY
[PARAMETER ERROR]
SENTENCE NO.: xxx
KIND: DATA Communication error between BB and MKD
FACTOR NO.: xx
PRESS ANY KEY
[PARAMETER ERROR]
SENTENCE NO.: xxx
Communication error between BB and MKD
KIND: MODE
PRESS ANY KEY
CHANGE NAV STATUS? When ship type is tanker and MOORED is chosen,
PRESS ANY KEY ship speed exceeds 3 knot.
TX POWER CHANGED.
(xxxW) Transmission output changed
PRESS ANY KEY
ILLEGAL MODE WAS SELECTED In setting of transmission and reception mode,
PRESS ANY KEY combinations other than designated are chosen.
NO MESSAGE When “SEND MSG” is chosen, no transmission
PRESS ANY KEY message is found.
NO SEL Target with no data was attempted to be displayed in
PRESS ANY KEY detail.
OUT OF RANGE !: CPA:0-6.00 Value entered in [CPA] of CPA/TCPA ALARM is
PRESS ANY KEY. outside the range.
OUT OF RANGE !: TCPA:0-60 Value entered in [TCPA] of CPA/TCPA ALARM is
PRESS ANY KEY. outside the range.
OUT OF RANGE !:
Outside of range error in NAV STATUS -> NAV
NAV STATUS:0-15
STATUS
PRESS ANY KEY.
OUT OF RANGE !:
NAV STATUS -> DESTINATION -> destination name
DESTINATION FULL
FULL (MAX. 20 cases)
PRESS ANY KEY.
OUT OF RANGE !: DAY Outside of range error in NAV STATUS -> ARRIVAL
PRESS ANY KEY. TIME -> DATE
OUT OF RANGE !: HOUR:0-23
Outside of range error in NAV STATUS ->
MINUTE:0-59
ARRIVAL TIME -> TIME
PRESS ANY KEY.
OUT OF RANGE !: CREW:0-8191 Outside of range error in NAV STATUS ->
PRESS ANY KEY. CARGO TYPE & CREW -> CREW
OUT OF RANGE !: TYPE NO:10-99 Outside of range error in NAV STATUS ->
PRESS ANY KEY. CARGO TYPE & CREW -> TYPE NO.
OUT OF RANGE!:
Outside of range error in NAV STATUS ->
DRAUGHT:0-25.5
DRAUGHT -> DRAUGHT
PRESS ANY KEY.
8-35
Outside of range error in I/O PORT -> LAN PORT ->

OUT OF RANGE !: 0-255 IP ADDRESS
PRESS ANY KEY. Outside of range error in I/O PORT -> LAN PORT ->
SUB NET MASK
OUT OF RANGE !: 0-65535 Outside of range error in I/O PORT ->
PRESS ANY KEY. SET LAN PORT -> PORT NO.
OUT OF RANGE !: ZONE:1-8
Outside of range of ZONE value of EDIT CHANNEL
PRESS ANY KEY.
Outside of range of A, B values of
OUT OF RANGE !: 0-511
[SET INT ANT POS.] and [SET EXT ANT POS.] of
PRESS ANY KEY.
INITIAL SETTINGS
Outside of range of C, D values of
OUT OF RANGE !: 0-63
[SET INT ANT POS.] and [SET EXT ANT POS.] of
PRESS ANY KEY.
INITIAL SETTINGS
8-36
8.9 Trouble Shooting

Case 1) “Communication Error” is shown.
This error is shown when a communication error occurs between the MKD (FA-1502)
and the transponder (FA-1501). See page 8-5.
“Communication Error” is shown.
No
FA-1501, turned on the power? Turn on the power
Yes FA-1501: FA-1502:

[DISP] COM
1. TDA 3. RXA
Is the wiring connection between No 2. TDB 4. RXB
FA-1501 and FA-1502 correct? 3. GND ISO ７．０Ｖ
4. RXA 1. TDA
5. RXB 2. TDB
6. GND ISO 8. 0V
Yes 7. SW(+) 5. SW(+)
8. SW(-) 6. SW(-)
1. Connect PC to [PC] Port on FA-1501.

(Hyperterminal: 38.4 kbps) No
Failure of MAIN board
2. Check output data output or no output.
Yes
Failure of MOT board
8-37
Case 2) “TX” error is shown.

This is an error of transmission output. The error occurs when transmission output is
decreased, when transmission output is not detected, or when the PLL circuit on the TX
board is unlocked. See pages 5-7 and 8-26.
“TX” error is shown.
Check the currently operating transmission

output on “View Channel”. 1W, 2W, 12.5W
[MENU] -> Channel settings -> View channel
VR VF
Power
Check “A/D Monitor”. Refer to the VF and Rx Tx Rx Tx
0W 39 - 21 -
VR values (Antenna: 50Ω termination)
43 76
1W 39 25
(62) (50)
45 95
2W 39 21
[MENU] -> Diagnostics -> For service (75) (70)
-> Other -> Debug menu -> A/D monitor 57 242
12.5W 39 21
(137) (149)
Values in ( ) are threshold (judgment) values.
Are VF/ VR values increased even a little when

transmission is made?
No
Yes
Check the connection of “Tx 45 MHz” between

Failure of TX board the TX board (J4) and the MAIN board (J3).
Is it OK?
Yes
Failure of TX board or MAIN board
8-38
Case 3) EPFS, L/L, SOG, COG, HDT or ROT error is shown.

Sensor signals are not received. Check the reception condition of the Internal GPS
([Menu]-> Internal GPS), and the connection and setting of the External sensors.
The time-out of each sentence is 5 seconds. When data is not received for 5 seconds or
more, a corresponding error is shown. A corresponding error is also shown when data is
invalid. See pages 3-6, 8-4, 8-7, 8-22 and 8-29.
Following errors are shown.
“EPFS” “L/L” “SOG “COG” “HDG” “ROT”
No Position data No SOG/COG data from No HDG or TI-ROT data

from the EXT GPS the EXT and INT
No Position data from No HDG data

the EXT and INT
To the next page. To the next page. To the next page.
Check the INT GPS in “[MENU] ->

Diagnostics -> Transponder test -> The status of the INT GPS can be checked
GPS test”. Is it OK? in “[MENU] -> Internal GPS”.
Yes No
Failure of GPS Antenna Is the power 3.3 VDC supplied to

the GPS Antenna terminal?
Yes No
･ ROM/RAM/GPS Com. error: Failure Failure of GPS board

of GPS receiver board or MAIN board
･ ANT error: Failure of GPS antenna
8-39
“EPFS” “HDG” “ROT”
Is the connection of sensor input OK? Are the settings of “Mode” and ”Speed” of the
connection port OK?
IEC(NMEA):
[COM4] to [COM6] -> #4(RDA) - #5(RDB), Mode: Sensor, Speed: IEC61162-1(4800 bps)
AD-100:
[COM6] -> #10(AD data-H) - #11(AD data-C), #12(AD CLK-H) - #13(AD CLK-C),
Mode: Sensor, Speed: AD-10
Note:
Yes Connect the sensor input of each COM
port either to C.Loop or RS-422. Input is
not allowed through both ports.
Is the result of the I/O Monitor test OK?

[MENU] -> Diagnostics ->
For service -> I/O Monitor
No
Yes
Conduct the loop back test.

NMEA Ver- 2.0 or later? [MENU] -> Diagnostics -> For service ->
I/O port test
No
Yes NG
Failure of MAIN board Failure of MOT board or MAIN board

Or the error could be caused due to
the status of sentences or format.
Replace the GPS.
･ Use the RMC sentence.

･ Uncheck the setting of “[MENU] -> Diagnostics ->
For service -> Other -> Check sum” by option menu.
8-40
Case 4) Receiving targets get less or no.

The error may be caused when the receiving channel is not set appropriately for
operating channels in the sea area, or when the receiver board or VHF Antenna is faulty.
See pages 3-24, 8-19 and 8-20.
Receiving targets get less or no.
Execute “[MENU] -> Diagnostics ->

For service -> Rx Test”.
･ RX1 NG: Failure of RX1 board
･ RX2 NG: Failure of RX2 board
No ･ DSC NG: Failure of DSC board
Are the results of all the tests of
RX1, RX2 and DSC OK? ･ All NG: Failure of DSC board, and
MAIN board
Yes
Yes
Is “ANT” error shown? Check the antenna or
Antenna coaxial cable.
No
Are “CH & PWR Settings” No Set “CH SET” to “AUTO” in

specified as “AUTO”? “[MENU] -> Diagnostics -> For
service -> CH & PWR Settings”.
Yes
No Configure the setting of the sea

Is the setting appropriate for area in ”[MENU] -> Channel
receiving channels of the sea area? settings -> Edit channel”.
Check the currently operating
Yes channels in ”[MENU] -> Channel
settings -> View channel”.
No
Can be received when VHF RT Antenna Failure of TX board.
is used?
Yes
Failure of VHF Antenna or DB-1.
8-41
Case 5) Received targets are not displayed on the Radar (FAR-2xx7 series)
The error may be caused due to the failure of wiring or setting. Check by the I/O signal
monitor test on the FAR and AIS both. See pages 3-6, 8-21, 8-22 and AP4-3.
Received targets are not

displayed on the radar.
No
Is the setting on the FAR, OK? Set the setting of AIS DISP to “ON”.
Yes FA-1501: FAR-2xx7:

[COM2] to [COM4] [AIS]
1. TDA 3. RXA
Is the connection correct? No 2. TDB 4. RXB
The connection port of the Radar 3. GND ISO 5. GND
is COM2 to COM4. 4. RXA 1. TDA
5. RXB 2. TDB
6. GND ISO 5. GND
Yes
Are the settings of “Mode” and ”Speed” No Setting as follows:

for the Radar connection port OK? - Mode: EXT display
- Speed: 37.8kbps
Yes
Checking procedure as follows:
- FAR-2xx7; Execute “Self test” -> Check “AIS (VDO/VDM)”
- FA-150; [MENU] -> Diagnostics -> For service -> I/O Monitor
Note: A message (ABM) should be sent properly from the FAR.
Is the result of “I/O Monitor” test

of the radar and AIS both, OK?
No
Yes
Change the Radar type to “C or B”. Do the loop back test.

(Operation on AIS display differs [MENU] -> Diagnostics ->
according to the Radar type. Refer to For service -> I/O port test
the Service Manual.)
NG
- If the result is NG, the error is caused due to the failure of the
MOT board or MAIN board.
- If the result is OK when the connection port of the Radar is
changed, the error is caused due to the failure of the MAIN board.
8-42
Chapter 9.Chapter
Q& 9. QA
&A
Q1: Strange characters are displayed on the target list. What do they mean?
- No mark: Vessel
- Search and Rescue Aircraft: S (Detecting from Msg. 9)
- Aids to Navigation: ª (Detecting from Msg. 21)
- AIS Base Station: (Detecting from Msg. 4)
Q2: It seems to take long time to display the Name of Ship. (See page 1-2.)
The Name of Ship, Call Sign, etc. are static data is transmitted every 6 minutes. In
addition, they are transmitted when any data change occurs or polling is received
from other ship or VTS. Wait for a while until the static data is received.
Q3: Does FA-150 have a polling function?

FA-150 has no polling function. However, on the PC-version display (PC MKD),
polling can be carried out.
PC-version display software: FAISPC MARK2 is optional.
Q4: Second FA-1502 can be connected? (See page 3-28.)

Yes, it could. Connect the second FA-1502 to COM2 or COM3.
However, FA-1502 power control lines SW-H and C should be connected in parallel
with the DISP port power control line.
Operation is equal for both No. 1 and No. 2 but [MENU] -> USER SETTINGS can
be set independently, except the setting of Long Range of this menu.
Q5: COMMUNICATION ERROR is displayed. Where should I check?

It is displayed on FA-1502 when communication with FA-1501 is disabled. Check if
FA-1501 power supply switch is turned ON. Check if the DISP port is correctly
connected. See page 8-37.
Q6: Are settings of DIM and CONTRAST stored in memory even if the power is
turned off?
Both settings are stored in memory. However, turning off the power supply with the
contrast set to 35 or lower automatically sets the contrast to 36 when the power
supply is turned on next time.
9-1
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q7: Where is the tanker mode setting carried out?

There is no setting such as “the tanker mode is turned ON/OFF.” Under the
following conditions, the system enters the tanker mode in which the transmission
output is reduced to 1 W automatically.
- When No. 80: TANKER is chosen in [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET
SHIP TYPE;
- When MOORED is chosen in [NAV STATUS]; and
- When the ship speed is 3 knot or less.
When POWER becomes 1 W in [MENU] -> CHANNEL SETTINGS -> VIEW
CHANNEL, the system is in the tanker mode. In addition, when the system enters the
tanker mode, TX POWER CHANGED 1W popup display appears.
When the ship speed exceeds 3 knot with [NAV STATUS] set to MOORED, popup
displays TX POWER CHANGED 12.5W and CHANGE NAV STATUS? appear.
Users are prompted to change NAV STATUS with the message “CHANGE NAV
STATUS?”
Q8. Is it possible to connect sensors to COM1, COM2 and COM3 ports?

(See page 3-11.)
Yes, it is, but it is the principle to connect the sensor input to COM4, COM5, or
COM6. Note that priority of COM1, COM2, and COM3 are not higher than to COM4,
COM5, and COM6. The related setting is [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET
I/O PORT -> SET PRIORITY. COM1, COM2, and COM3 ports do not have this
kind of setting.
Q9: Is NMEA Ver-1.5 able to be used as sensor input? (See page 8-8 and 30.)
No, NMEA Ver-1.5 cannot be used as sensor input. The AIS is required IEC61162
sentence. Sentences of NMEA Ver-1.5 are no check-sum field.
Reference:
It is possible to set whether or not the check-sum is carried out in [MENU] ->
FOR SERVICE -> OTHER -> CHECK SUM by carrying out the special
operation.
Q10: How to check sensor input. (See pages 8-22 and 23.)
Choose the port to monitor the sentence by [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> I/O
MONITOR. Irrespective of NMEA Ver, the input data can be monitored. However,
the monitor displays only in uppercase. Lowercase is displayed smeared: half-toned,
to which care must be taken.
If you cannot monitor the sensor data, check the connections of sensor port.
Other way, the I/O check of each port can be carried out by the loop back test. The
test is carried out by [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> I/O PORT TEST.
9-2
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q11: How to check whether or not transmission is taking place.

(See pages 8-27 and 32.)
Simple methods to check whether or not transmission is taking place as follows.
- [TX] alarm is not displayed. This alarm detection is found from the Tx output
power.
- When the antenna mark blinks to the transmission interval in the OWN
DYNAMIC DATA screen, the message is being transmitted.
- When CR6 of TX board blinks to the transmission interval. When the Tx output
power is about 0.5 W or higher, CR6 goes on.
- When the VF value increase in [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> OTHER -> A/D
MONITOR, transmission is being taking place. In the no transmission period,
the VF value is 20 to 25, when transmission is carried out at 12.5 W, the VF
value increase to 200 to 250, and at 2 W, the VF value increases to 75 to 125.
Q12: What does the antenna mark on the top right of a screen for OWN
DYNAMIC DATA? (See page 8-32.)
[OWN DYNAMIC DATA] Antenna mark is displayed.

22/JUN/2005 06:43:20 It indicates that the system is being synchronized
LAT : 34 27.8412’N with UTC of built-in GPS. The antenna mark
LON : 135 25.1232’E
disappears if the system is not synchronized with
COG : 57.0 HDG : 123 the built-in GPS.
ROT : R10.0 /min Antenna mark blinks.
PA : H RAIM : USE
It indicates that transmission is being carried out.
Q13: Can FA-150 receive Distress alert or Individual calling of VHF DSC?
FA-150 cannot receive Distress alert, Individual calling, All ship calling, etc.
Even if it is the same channel (CH70) and signal format as VHF DSC, messages
unrelated to AIS are not decode.
Q14: The alarm output (See pages 8-2 and 3-22.)

In AIS related alarm condition, alarm buzzer comes on and EXT ALM is activated,
too. This condition continues until the ALM ACK signal is turned ON, any of the
panel keys is pressed or the alarm event is removed.
In addition, the alarm is outputted by ALR sentences at every 25 seconds. If there is
no error, the content of the ALR sentence, that is, messages “Alarm is General
Failure and alarm condition is in the normal range (V)” are outputted at every 2
minutes. For the related setting, EXT ALM output form can be changed. The setting
is carried out through [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> OTHER -> ALARM MODE.
9-3
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q15: What is the USCG mode? (See page 8-29.)

This mode is the function special for USCG and is the mode to change over Class A
mode, Rx only mode or Restricted mode. These functions are changed over by the
[DIM] key. SILENT ON/OFF is set by;
Turn on power while pressing [MENU] and [ENT] key, then press [MENU] -> FOR
SERVICE -> OTHER -> SILENT MENU after carrying out the special operation.
[MENU] RX ONLY MODE Any one of the modes which are set is displayed.
MSG - CLASS A MODE (Normal mode)
SENSOR STATUS - RX ONLY MODE (No Tx)
INTERNAL GPS - RESTRICTED (Rx and Msg.6 and Msg.8 are
USER SETTINGS allowed to be transmitted)
INITIAL SETTINGS
CHENNEL SETTIONGS
DIAGNOSTICS
Q16: What is optional FAISPC-MARK2? (See AP5.)

FAISPC-MARK2 is PC-version display software.
PC is used by connecting it to the PC port or LAN port (optional).
Q17: I want to demonstrate FA-150 for an exhibition. (See page 8-24.)

Set it to the simulator mode. No connection of sensors is required.
This setting is carried out in [MENU] -> FOR SERVICE -> OTHER -> SIM MODE.
There are two kinds of this mode which simulate 5 vessels navigating the Osaka Bay
area and 9 vessels navigating in the Tokyo Bay area.
In addition, same as normal condition, VDM and VDO sentences: simulation-related
data are outputted.
For static data, such as MMSI, IMO No., ANT POS, and others, set parameters are
used. The position data forms the status same as that when the data was inputted from
the GPS. In addition, once the system enters the simulator mode, “S” is displayed in
the upper right end of all the screens. This mode continues to hold this function even
if the power is turned off.
9-4
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q18: Targets lost conditions

Signals from the target are not received at the time shown below, the target is lost
target display. Furthermore, six minuets and 40 seconds after loss of signal the
target’s data is erased.
Time to change to
Ship’s Maneuvering Condition
lost targets
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots. 10 minutes
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots. 50 seconds
Ship 0-14 knots 50 seconds
Ship 0-14 knots and changing course 50 seconds
Ship 14-23 knots 25 seconds
Ship 14-23 knots and changing course 25 seconds
Ship > 23 knots 7 seconds
Ship > 23 knots changing course 7 seconds
Reference:
FAR-2xx7 lost conditions include;
- The target is not received 5 times in the notification intervals of the target, and
- The target is not received for 6 minutes.
FA-100-side lost conditions;
- When the target is not received for more than 3 minutes and 20 seconds, the lost
status appears. Furthermore, 3 minutes and 20 seconds after loss of signal the
target’s data is erased.
Q19: To which port should NAVNET 2 be connected? (See page 3-6.)

Connect to COM2 or 3 ports.
Setting of FA-150 COM port and NAVNET 2 are:
- FA-150 COM port; MODE -> HI LEVEL IF and SPEED -> 38.4 kbps.
- NAVNET2; DATA2 port used,
BAUD RATE -> 38.4 kbps or AUTO in [MENU] -> E -> C -> A ->
B(DATA2: NMEA PORT).
Q20: What sentences are VDO and VDM? (See pages AP4-16 and 17.)
VDO is a U-AIS VHF Data-Link Own-vessel message. Using this sentence, the data
which FA-150 reported is outputted. In addition, every 1 second, the MSG.1 position
report is outputted using this sentence. VDM is a U-AIS VHF Data-link Message.
The received message is outputted using this sentence.
9-5
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q21: Could we use FA-100 GPS antenna?

For FA-150, the former GPS antenna and composite antenna set for FA-100 are
unable to be used. Because the current consumption of the former GPS antenna is
larger than the new model GPS, the use of the former GPS antenna causes the over
current protection circuit of GPS core: GN-8093 incorporated into the FA-150 proper
to work. However, in FA-100, both new and former GPS antennas can be used.
Identify the new and the former GPS antennas by SNo. of GPS antenna.
The model No. indicated on the GPS antenna is either GVA-100 or GSC-001 and it is
unable to identify which is the new antenna and which is the former one.
The table below shows GPS antennas which can be used in FA-100 and FA-150.
FA-100 FA-150 Remarks

Former GPS, with no
GVA-100-E
VHF ANT
Former GPS, with
GVA-100-J
Composite VHF ANT
antenna GVA-100-T-E New GPS, with no
GVA-100-T-E
(for and after SNo. 4651) VHF ANT
GVA-100-T-J New GPS, with
GVA-100-T-J
(for and after SNo. 4651) VHF ANT
GSC-001-FA
GPS
GSC-001-FA-T
antenna GSC-001-FA-T
(for and after SNo. 100101)
GPS core GN-79 GN-8093
Q22: What Msg. type should be selected when transmitting the test message?
It would be appropriate to set ADDRESS TYPE to ADDRESS CAST and MSG
TYPE to SAFETY, and CHANNEL to BOTH. To test your AIS with other Furuno
AIS, MSG TYPE may be set either to Normal or Safety but to test your AIS with
other company’s AIS, it is recommended to set MSG TYPE to SAFETY to ensure
reliable communication.
This is because the handling of binary messages deffer in accord with equipment
(manufacturers).
Reference:
- MSG-6; Binary data for addressed communication (DAC: 001, FI: 00)
- MSG-8; Binary data for broadcast communication (DAC: 001, FI: 00)
- MSG-12; Safety related data for addressed communication
- MSG-14; Safety related data for broadcast communication
9-6
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q23: Handling of messages

The table below shows handling of messages received.
Received alarm
Data Output to VDM serial Ack
Message (buzzer and
form FA-150 display data output transmission
popup display)
MSG 6 Binary No Yes No Yes
Address-cast Normal Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
MSG 8 Binary No Yes No No
Broad-cast Normal Text Yes Yes Yes No
MSG 12
Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Address-cast Safety
MSG 14
Text Yes Yes Yes No
Broad-cast Safety
Q24: Where are frequency and output power adjusted? (See page 7-5.)
The frequency tolerance is within ±3 ppm. There is no place for adjusting the
frequency. If the frequency is out of range, replace the TX board.
Output is adjusted by TX board R133 with the output set to 12.5 W. There is no
output adjustment for 2 W and 1 W.
9-7
Chapter 9. Q & A
Q25: How long is the AIS communication range?

Sight distance
Because radio wave propagated between two points in the VHF band is limited by the
sight distance: Do, assuming the antenna height of the own ship to be 4 m: h1 and the
antenna height of the other ship to be 25 m: h2,
Do km = 4.12 (√h1 + √h1)
Do km = 4.12 (√4 + √25) = 28.8 km = 15.6 NM,
and therefore, the sight distance is 28.8 km (15.6 NM).
Electric field intensity in the free space
The AIS transmission output is 12.5 W. Because the electric power fed to the antenna
depends on the coaxial cable length, if this length is assumed to be 20 m, the loss is
about 20 %. In addition, the radiation efficiency of antenna is assumed to be 100 %.
Consequently, the electric power fed to the antenna is given by:
12.5 W x 80 % = 10 W.
The antenna current: Ia that runs through the antenna is given by:
Ia = 10W/50Ω =0.45 A
The effective height of antenna: he is given by:
he = λ / π
where, λ: VHF wavelength (3 x 108/160 MHz = 1.9 m)
he = 1.9 / π = 0.6 m.
In general, the electric field intensity: E (V/m) of a free space which is “d m” distant
from the doublet antenna is calculated by the following equation. For example, the
electric field intensity at the sight distance: 28.8 km is given by:
E (V/m) = (60 π x Ia x he) / λ x d
where, Ia: antenna current (0.45 A)
he: effective height of antenna (0.6 m)
λ: VHF wavelength (1.9 m)
d: distance (28,800 m)
E (V/m) = (60 π x 0.45 x 0.6)/1.9 x 28,800 = 0.00093
E dBµV/m = 20 log(0.00093/1 x 10-6 ) = 59.4 dBµV/m
In such event, the voltage induced in the antenna: Eant is given by:
Eant = 59.4 dBµV/m + 20 log0.6 = 55 dBµV
Minimum reception level of AIS device
It is defined that the packet error rate is within 20 % at +6 dBµV (2µV).
Consequently, within the sight distance of 15.6 NM, radio waves can be satisfactorily
received. When the distance is greater than this, radio waves are propagated by
diffraction waves and radio waves are rapidly attenuated. The graph of the next page
indicates that the communication distance to achieve +6 dBµV is 60 km (32 NM).
9-8
Chapter 9. Q & A
Reception distance calculation curve (h1 = 10 m; transmission output: 10 W)

The graph below is used to find the electric field intensity at h1: 10 m and h2, the
antenna height of the other ship, with 144 MHz and 10 W antenna output.
To AIS, the 150 MHz band is assigned but it can be regarded to provide the same
propagation characteristics of 144 MHz of the table below.
The method to find the reception distance:
Assume that the antenna of the own ship is 3 m and that of the other ship is 10 to 30
m. The intersection of the X-axis of the line of minimum electric field intensity:
+10.4 dBµV/m: +6 dBµV-(20 log0.6) and the curve with the antenna height of the
other ship, for example, 20 m assumed is the reception distance.
Consequently, from the graph, 50 - 70 km (26 - 38 NM) is the communication range
of the VHF band and the communication of the distance exceeding it would be said
abnormal propagation.
dBuV/m
Electric field intensity
+10.4 dB
For example, assume

the antenna of the other
ship is 20 m.
Communication distance
to be found
Range km
9-9
Appendix 1. Specifications
AP1. Specifications
1. TRANSPONDER UNIT
1.1 TX/RX Frequency: 156.025 MHz to 162.025 MHz
1.2 Output Power: 1 W/ 2 W/ 12.5 W within ±1.5 dB, selectable
1.3 Impedance: 50 ohms
1.4 DSC Receiver: CH70 fixed, 156.525 MHz, G2B, 1200 bps
1.5 Bandwidth: 25 kHz/ 12.5 kHz
2. MONITOR UNIT
2.1 Display: 4.5-inch, monochrome LCD
2.2 Display Size: 60 (H) x 95 (W) mm
2.3 No. of Dots: 120 x 64 dots
3. GPS RECEIVER
3.1 Receiving Channels: 12 channels parallel, 12 satellites tracking
3.2 Rx Frequency/ Rx Code: 1575.42 MHz, C/A code
3.3 Position Fixing System: All in view, 8-state Kalman filter
3.4 Position Accuracy: Approx. 10 m, 95 % of the time, (HDOP ≤ 4)
DGPS: approx. less than 5 m, 95 % of the time
3.5 Tracking Velocity: 900 kts
3.6 Position-fixing Time: Warm start: 36 seconds, Cold start: 43 seconds
3.7 Position Update Interval: 1 second
3.8 DGPS Data Receiving: RTCM SC-104 Ver 2.1 formatted
4. INTERFACES
4.1 COM1 – COM4: IEC 61162-1(2000-07) / 61162-2(1998-09)
Input: VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM, GBS,
GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT,
VBW, VTG
Output: VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2,
LR3, LRF, LRI
Note; COM4 also functions as SENSOR input.
4.2 SENSOR (input): IEC 61162-1(2000-07) / 61162-2(1998-09)
AP1-1
AP1. Specifications
4.3 COM4 – 6 (input): DTM, GNS, GLL, GGA, RMC, VBW, VTG, OSD, HDT,
GBS, ROT
4.4 External Beacon: RS-232C (PC)
4.5 PC: RS-232C
4.6 Alarm Output: Contact closure
4.7 AD-10: AD-10 format (FURUNO gyro format)
5. POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Monitor Unit: 12 - 24 VDC: 0.3 - 0.15 A
5.2 Transponder Unit: 12 - 24 VDC: 7 - 3.5 A
5.3 AC/DC Power Supply Unit: PR-240 (option)
100-115/200-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
6.1 Ambient Temperature
GPS Antenna Unit: -25 °C to +70 °C
Other Units: -15 °C to +55 °C
6.2 Relative Humidity 95 % at 40 °C
6.3 Waterproofing (IEC 60529)
Antenna Unit: IPX6
Other Units: IPX0
6.4 Vibration (IEC 60945 ed. 4)
From 2 Hz-5 Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm ±10 %
(Maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz: 7 m/s2)
7. COATING COLOR
7.1 GPS Antenna Unit: N9.5
7.2 Other Units: 2.5GY5/1.5
AP1-2
Appendix 2. VHF Channel List
AP2. VHF Channel List
AP2.1 International mode

Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ.
1001 156.05 1088 157.425 277 156.8875 2079 161.575
1002 156.1 1201 156.0625 1278 156.9375 2080 161.625
1003 156.15 1202 156.1125 1279 156.9875 2081 161.675
1004 156.2 1203 156.1625 1280 157.0375 2082 161.725
1005 156.25 1204 156.2125 1281 157.0875 2083 161.775
6 156.3 1205 156.2625 1282 157.1375 2084 161.825
1007 156.35 1206 156.3125 1283 157.1875 2085 161.875
1018 156.9 1207 156.3625 1284 157.2375 2086 161.925
1019 156.95 208 156.4125 1285 157.2875 2087 161.975
1020 157 209 156.4625 1286 157.3375 2088 162.025
1021 157.05 210 156.5125 1287 157.3875 2201 160.6625
1022 157.1 211 156.5625 2001 160.65 2202 160.7125
1023 157.15 212 156.6125 2002 160.7 2203 160.7625
1024 157.2 213 156.6625 2003 160.75 2204 160.8125
1025 157.25 214 156.7125 2004 160.8 2205 160.8625
1026 157.3 215 156.7625 2005 160.85 2206 160.9125
1027 157.35 216 156.8125 2007 160.95 2207 160.9625
1028 157.4 217 156.8625 8 156.4 2218 161.5125
1060 156.025 1218 156.9125 9 156.45 2219 161.5625
1061 156.075 1219 156.9625 10 156.5 2220 161.6125
1062 156.125 1220 157.0125 11 156.55 2221 161.6625
1063 156.175 1221 157.0625 12 156.6 2222 161.7125
1064 156.225 1222 157.1125 13 156.65 2223 161.7625
1065 156.275 1223 157.1625 14 156.7 2224 161.8125
1066 156.325 1224 157.2125 15 156.75 2225 161.8625
67 156.375 1225 157.2625 16 156.8 2226 161.9125
68 156.425 1226 157.3125 17 156.85 2227 161.9625
69 156.475 1227 157.3625 2018 161.5 2228 162.0125
70 156.525 1228 157.4125 2019 161.55 2260 160.6375
71 156.575 1260 156.0375 2020 161.6 2261 160.6875
72 156.625 1261 156.0875 2021 161.65 2262 160.7375
73 156.675 1262 156.1375 2022 161.7 2263 160.7875
74 156.725 1263 156.1875 2023 161.75 2264 160.8375
75 156.775 1264 156.2375 2024 161.8 2265 160.8875
76 156.825 1265 156.2875 2025 161.85 2266 160.9375
77 156.875 1266 156.3375 2026 161.9 2278 161.5375
1078 156.925 267 156.3875 2027 161.95 2279 161.5875
1079 156.975 268 156.4375 2028 162 2280 161.6375
1080 157.025 269 156.4875 2060 160.625 2281 161.6875
1081 157.075 270 156.5375 2061 160.675 2282 161.7375
1082 157.125 271 156.5875 2062 160.725 2283 161.7875
1083 157.175 272 156.6375 2063 160.775 2284 161.8375
1084 157.225 273 156.6875 2064 160.825 2285 161.8875
1085 157.275 274 156.7375 2065 160.875 2286 161.9375
1086 157.325 275 156.7875 2066 160.925 2287 161.9875
1087 157.375 276 156.8375 2078 161.525
AP2-1
AP2.2 USA mode
AP2.2 USA mode

Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ. Ch No. FREQ.
1001 156.05 1088 157.425 277 156.8875 2079 161.575
1201 156.0625 1278 156.9375 2080 161.625
1003 156.15 1202 156.1125 1279 156.9875 2081 161.675
1203 156.1625 1280 157.0375 2082 161.725
1005 156.25 1204 156.2125 1281 157.0875 2083 161.775
6 156.3 1205 156.2625 1282 157.1375 2084 161.825
1007 156.35 1206 156.3125 1283 157.1875 2085 161.875
1018 156.9 1207 156.3625 1284 157.2375 2086 161.925
1019 156.95 208 156.4125 1285 157.2875 2087 161.975
1020 157 209 156.4625 1286 157.3375 2088 162.025
1021 157.05 210 156.5125 1287 157.3875 2201 160.6625
1022 157.1 211 156.5625 2001 160.65 2202 160.7125
1023 157.15 212 156.6125 2002 160.7 2203 160.7625
1024 157.2 213 156.6625 2003 160.75 2204 160.8125
1025 157.25 214 156.7125 2004 160.8 2205 160.8625
1026 157.3 215 156.7625 2005 160.85 2206 160.9125
1027 157.35 216 156.8125 2007 160.95 2207 160.9625
1028 157.4 217 156.8625 8 156.4 2218 161.5125
1218 156.9125 9 156.45 2219 161.5625
1061 156.075 1219 156.9625 10 156.5 2220 161.6125
1220 157.0125 11 156.55 2221 161.6625
1063 156.175 1221 157.0625 12 156.6 2222 161.7125
1064 156.225 1222 157.1125 13 156.65 2223 161.7625
1065 156.275 1223 157.1625 14 156.7 2224 161.8125
1066 156.325 1224 157.2125 15 156.75 2225 161.8625
67 156.375 1225 157.2625 16 156.8 2226 161.9125
68 156.425 1226 157.3125 17 156.85 2227 161.9625
69 156.475 1227 157.3625 2018 161.5 2228 162.0125
70 156.525 1228 157.4125 2019 161.55 2260 160.6375
71 156.575 1260 156.0375 2020 161.6 2261 160.6875
72 156.625 1261 156.0875 2021 161.65 2262 160.7375
73 156.675 1262 156.1375 2022 161.7 2263 160.7875
74 156.725 1263 156.1875 2023 161.75 2264 160.8375
75 156.775 1264 156.2375 2024 161.8 2265 160.8875
76 156.825 1265 156.2875 2025 161.85 2266 160.9375
77 156.875 1266 156.3375 2026 161.9 2278 161.5375
1078 156.925 267 156.3875 2027 161.95 2279 161.5875
1079 156.975 268 156.4375 2028 162 2280 161.6375
1080 157.025 269 156.4875 2060 160.625 2281 161.6875
1081 157.075 270 156.5375 2061 160.675 2282 161.7375
1082 157.125 271 156.5875 2062 160.725 2283 161.7875
1083 157.175 272 156.6375 2063 160.775 2284 161.8375
1084 157.225 273 156.6875 2064 160.825 2285 161.8875
1085 157.275 274 156.7375 2065 160.875 2286 161.9375
1086 157.325 275 156.7875 2066 160.925 2287 161.9875
1087 157.375 276 156.8375 2078 161.525
1 W power on CH13 and CH67.
AP2-2
AP2.3 Channel Number Assignments
AP2.3 Channel Number Assignments
1. International AIS Channel

- 2087: 161.975 MHz (AIS-1)
- 2088: 162.025 MHz (AIS-2)
2. For channel number assignments to simplex operation of duplex channels:
Channel Number Ship Ship & Coast Coast
For normal duplex operation: 60 156.025 - 160.625

For simplex operation of ship station
- 156.025 -
frequency: 1060 (adding 1000)
For simplex operation of coast
- 160.625 -
Stati on frequency: 2060 (adding 2000)
3. For channel number assignments to simplex channels, addition of 1000 is made to

existing channel numbers.
4. For channel number assignments to narrowband operation (12.5 kHz) on 25 kHz

channels:
Channel Number Ship Ship & Coast Coast
For normal channel operation: 60 156.025 - 160.625

For 12.5 kHz operation on 25 kHz
156.025 - 160.625
channel: 460 (adding 400)
AP2-3
Appendix 3. AIS Messages
AP3.1 Messages
AP3.1 Messages
AP3.1.1 Message types
All message types are described on the next page. The message table (Table AP3.1.1)
uses the following columns:
- Category
F: Functional Message
S: System Management Message
F/S: Functional Message and System Management Message
- Priority
There are four levels of message priority, namely:
Priority 1 (highest priority):
Critical link management messages including position report messages in order to
ensure the viability of the link;
Priority 2 (highest service priority):

Safety related messages. These messages are transmitted with a minimum of delay;
Priority 3
Assignment, interrogation and responses to interrogation messages;
Priority 4 (lowest priority):

All other messages.
- Operation Mode
AU: Autonomous
AS: Assigned
IN: Interrogation/Polled
- Access scheme
This column indicates how a station may select slots for transmission of this
message.
- Communication State (Comm. State)

Used in the message. If a message does not contain a Communication State, it is
stated as “N/A(Not Applicable)”. Communication State where applicable indicates
expected future use of that slot. If no Communication State is indicated, the slot is
immediately available for future use.
- Mobile/Base
Indicates the message transmitting station. Mobile means mobile station, and Base
means base station.
AP3-1
AP3.1 Messages
Table AP3.1.1(a) Message summery -1
Operation Access Comm. Mobile/

Message ID Description Category Priority
mode scheme state Base
Scheduled position
SOTDMA
Position report;
1 F/S 1 Autonomous RATDMA SOTDMA Mobile
Report (Class A shipborne (1)
ITDMA
Mobile Equipment)
Assigned
Scheduled position
Position
2 Report; F/S 1 Assigned SOTDMA(9) SOTDMA Mobile
Report
(Class A shipborne
Mobile Equipment)
Special position
report, response
Position
3 to interrogation; F/S 1 Autonomous RATDMA ITDMA Mobile
Report
(Class A shipborne
Mobile Equipment)
Position, UTC, Date
Base
and current Slot (3) (7) FATDMA
4 Station F/S 1 Assigned SOTDMA Base
number of Base RATDMA
Report
station
Scheduled static
Static and
and voyage related
Voyage Autonomous RATDMA Not
5 vessel data report; F 4(5) Mobile
Related Assigned ITDMA(2) Applicable
(Class A shipborne
Data
Mobile Equipment)
Binary Binary data for Autonomous RATDMA(10)
Not Mobile/
6 Addressed addressed F 4 Assigned FATDMA
Applicable Base
Message communication Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
Ack. of received Autonomous RATDMA
Binary Not Mobile
7 addressed binary S 1 Assigned FATDMA
Ack. (2) Applicable /Base
data Interrog./Polled ITDMA
Binary Binary data for Autonomous RATDMA(10)
Not Mobile/
8 Broadcast broadcast F 4 Assigned FATDMA
Applicable Base
Message communication Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
Standard
Position report for
SAR RATDMA
airborn stations Autonomous SOTDMA
9 Aircraft F/S 1 FATDMA Mobile
involved in SAR Assigned ITDMA
Positiion ITDMA(1)
operations, only
Report
Autonomous RATDMA
UTC/Date Request UTC and Not Mobile/
10 F/S 3 Assigned FATDMA
inquiry date (2) Applicable Base
Interrog./Polled ITDMA
Autonomous
UTC/Date Current UTC and RATDMA
11 F/S 3 Assigned (2) SOTDMA Mobile
Response date if available ITDMA
Interrog./Polled
Addressed (10)
Safety related data Autonomous RATDMA
Safety Not Mobile/
12 for addressed F 2 Assigned FATDMA
Related Applicable Base
communication Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
Message
Safety Ack. of received Autonomous RATDMA
Not Mobile/
13 Related addressed safety S 1 Assigned FATDMA
Applicable Base
Ack. related message Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
Safety (10)
Safety related data Autonomous RATDMA
Related Not Mobile/
14 for broadcast F 2 Assigned FATDMA
broardcast Applicable Base
communication Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
Message
AP3-2
AP3.1 Messages
Table AP3.1.1(b) Message summery -2
Request for a
specific message
Autonomous RATDMA
Type; (can result in Not Mobile/
15 Inter- F 3 Assigned FATDMA
multiple responses Applicable Base
rogation Interrog./Polled ITDMA(2)
from one or several
stations)
Assignment of a
Assign-
specific report
ment RATDMA Not
16 behaviour by F/S 1 Assigned Base
Mode FATDMA Applicable
competent authority
Command
using a base station
DGNSS
DGNSS corrections
Broadcast (3) RATDMA Not
17 provided by a base F 2 Assigned Base
Binary FATDMA Applicable
station
Message
Standard Position
Standard
Report for Class B
Class B
Shipborne Mobile Autonomous RATDMA SOTDMA
18 Equipment F/S 1 (1) Mobile
Equipment to be Assigned ITDMA ITDMA
Position
used instead of
report .(8)
Message 1,2,3
Extended Position
Extended
Report for Class B
Class B
Shipborn Mobile Autonomous Not
19 Equipment F/S 1 ITDMA Mobile
Equipment; Assigned Applicable
Position
contains additional
Report .(8)
static information
Data Link
Manage- Reserve slot for RATDMA Not
20 S 1 Assigned(3) Base
ment base station(s) FATDMA Applicable
Message
Autonomous
Aids-to- Position and Status
Assigned RATDMA Not Mobile/
21 Nav. Report for F/S 1
Interrog./Polled FATDMA Applicable Base
Report Aids-to- Nav. (3)
Management of
Channel
channels and RATDMA Not
22 Manage- S 1 Assigned(3) (6) Base
transceiver modes FATDMA Applicable
ment
by a base station
Note:
(1) ITDMA is used during the first frame phase and during a change of Report Rate (Rr).
SOTDMA is used during the continuous operation phase. RATDMA can be used at
any time to transmit additional position reports.
(2) This message type is broadcasted within 4 seconds. The RATDMA access scheme is
the default method for allocating the slot(s) for this message type. Alternatively, an
existing SOTDMA allocated slot can use the ITDMA access scheme for allocating
the slot(s) for this message. A base station may use an existing FATDMA allocated
slot for allocating the slot(s) for transmission of this message type.
(3) A base station is always operating in assigned mode using a fixed transmission
schedule (FATDMA) for its periodic transmissions. The “Data Link Message” is
used to announce the base station’s fixed allocation schedule. If necessary, either
ITDMA or RATDMA may be used to transmit non- periodic broadcasts.
AP3-3
AP3.1 Messages
(4) For interrogation of UTC and date, message identifier 10 is used.

(5) Priority 3, if in response to interrogation.
(6) In order to satisfy the requirements for dual channel operation, the following applies,
unless otherwise specified by Message 22:
a) For periodic repeated messages, including the initial link access, the
transmissions alternate between AIS1and AIS2.
b) Transmissions following slot allocation announcements, responses to requests,
and acknowledgements are transmitted on the same channel as the initial
message.
c) For addressed messages, transmissions utilize the channel in which a message
from the addressed station was last received.
d) For non-periodic messages other than those referenced above, the transmissions
of each message, regardless of message type, alternate between AIS1 and AIS2.
(7) Recommendations for base stations (dual channel operations): Base stations
alternate their transmissions between AIS 1 and AIS 2 for the following reasons:
a) to increase link capacity;
b) to balance channel loading between AIS 1 and AIS 2.
c) to mitigate the harmful effects of RF interface.
(8)
a) Equipment other than Class B Shipborne mobile does not transmit
message 18 and 19.
b) Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment only uses Message 18 and 19 for
position reporting and static data.
(9) When using reporting rate assignment by Message 16 the Access Scheme is
SOTDMA. When using assignment of transmission slots by Message 16 the Access
Scheme is assigned operation using SOTDMA Communication state.
(10) For Message 6, 8, 12 and 14 RATDMA transmissions from a mobile station does
not exceed a total of 20 slots in a frame with a maximum of 5 consecutive slots
per message.
AP3-4
AP3.1 Messages
AP3.1.2 Message Descriptions

This paragraph describes each message.
Message 1, 2, 3: Position Report

The position report is output periodically by mobile stations.
Table AP3.1.2 Message 1, 2, 3
Number
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for this message 1, 2, or 3
Used by the repeater to indicate how many times a
Repeat Indicator 2
message has been repeated.
User ID 30 MMIS number
Under way using engine, at anchor or not under
Navigational status 4
command etc
Turning head speed (ROT data is not derived from
ROT 8
COG information)
SOG 10 Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps
Position accuracy 1 Indicating the accuracy within 10 m or not.
Longitude 28 Longitude In 1/10000 min
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10000 min
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10º
True Heading 9 Degrees
UTC second when the report was generated by the
Time stamp 6 EPFS mode, or 61 if positioning system is in manual
input mode.
Reserved for regional
4 Reserved
applications
Spare 1 Not used.
RAIM-flag 1 RAIM flag of Electronic Position Fixing Device
Communication State 19
Total number of bits 168
AP3-5
AP3.1 Messages
Message 4: Base station report, Message 11: UTC and Date response
This message is used for reporting UTC time and date and, at the same time, position. A
base station uses Message 4 in its periodical transmissions. A mobile station outputs
Message 11 only in response to interrogation by Message 10. Message 11 is only
transmitted as a result of a UTC Request message (Message 10). The UTC and Data
response is transmitted on the channel, where the UTC request message was received.
Table AP3.1.3 Message 4, 11
Number
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for this message 4, 11
Repeat Indicator 2
UTC year 14 Year
UTC month 4 Month
UTC day 5 Day
UTC hour 5 Time
UTC minute 6 Minute
UTC second 6 Second
Longitude 28 Longitude In 1/10000 min
Latitude 27 Latitude In 1/10000 min
Type of Electronic
4 GPS, GLONASS, Loran-C etc
Position Fixing Device
Spare 10 Not used.
RAIM-flag 1 RAIM flag of Electronic Position Fixing Device
Communication State 19
AP3-6
AP3.1 Messages
Message 5: Ship Static and Voyage related data

This message is only used by Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment when reporting
static or voyage related data. It is transmitted immediately after any parameter value has
been changed.
Table AP3.1.4 Message 5
Number
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier fir this message 5
Repeat Indicator 2
AIS Version Indicator 2 Indicator for AIS Version
IMO number 30 IMO number
Call sign 42 7x6 bit ASCII characters
Name 120 Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII
Type of ship and cargo
8 Indicating the type of ship and cargo type
type
Overall
Reference point for reported position; also indicates
Dimension/ Reference 30
the dimension of ship in meters
for position
Type of EPFS 4 GPS, GLONASS, Loran-C etc
ETA 20 Estimated Time of Arrival
Maximum Present
8 In 1/10 m
Static draught
Destination 120 Maximum 20 characters using 6-bit ASCII
DTE 1 Data terminal ready
Spare 1 Not used.
Number of bits 424 Occupies 2 slots
Message 6: Addressed Binary Message

The Addressed Binary Message is variable in length, based on the amount of binary data.
The length varies between 1 and 5 slots.
Number of
bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for Message 6
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number OF source station
Sequence Number 2 Sequence Number
Destination ID 30 MMSI number of destination station
Retransmit Flag 1 Retransmit flag is set upon retransmission
Spare 1 Not used.
Binary Data Max.936 Application Identifier (16 bit) and data (Max. 920 bits)
Maximum number of bits Max.1008
AP3-7
AP3.1 Messages
Message 7: Binary Acknowledge, Message 13: Safety Related Acknowledge

Message 7 is used as an acknowledgement of up to 4 Messages 6 and is transmitted on
the same channel, that the addressed message to be acknowledged, was received.
Message 13 is used as an acknowledgement of up to 4 Messages 12 received, and is
transmitted on the same channel, that the addressed message to be acknowledged was
received.
Table AP3.1.6 Message 7, 13
Number
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for message 7, 13
Used by the repeater to indicate how many times
Repeat Indicator 2
a message has been repeated.
Source ID 30 MMSI number oaf source of this ACK
Spare 2 Not used.
Destination ID 1 30 MMSI number of first destination of this ACK
Sequence number of message to be
Sequence number for ID 1 2
acknowledged : 0-3.
Destination ID 2 30 MMSI number of second destination of this ACK
acknowledged : 0-3.
Destination ID 3 30 MMSI number of third destination of this ACK
acknowledged : 0-3.
Destination ID 4 30 MMSI number of fourth destination of this ACK
acknowledged : 0-3.
Total number of bits 72-168
Message 8: Binary Broadcast Message

This message is variable in length and its size is based on the amount of binary data.
The length varies between 1 and 5 slots.
Number
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for message 8
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number of source station
Spare 2 Not used.
Application Identifier (16 bit) and Application Data
Binary Data Max.968
(Max.952 bits)
MAX.100
Total Number of bits Occupies 1 to 5 slots
8
AP3-8
AP3.1 Messages
Message 9: Standard SAR Aircraft Position Report

This message is used as a standard position report for aircraft involved in SAR
operations instead of Message 1, 2, or 3. Stations other than aircraft involved in SAR
operations do not transmit this message. The default reporting interval for this message
is 10 seconds.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Altitude (derived from GNSS) expressed in meters
Altitude (GNSS) 12
(0-4094 m)
SOG 10 Speed over ground in knot steps (0-1022 knots)
Longitude 28 Longitude in 1/10000 min
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10000 min
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10º
Time stamp 6 EPFS mode, or 61 if positioning system is in manual
input mode
Reserved for regional Reserved for definition by a competent regional
8
applications authority.
DTE 1 Data terminal ready
Spare 3 Not used.
0= Station operating in autonomous and continuous
Assigned Mode Flag 1 mode
1= Station operating in assigned mode
RAIM-Flag 1 RAIM-Flag of Electronic Position Fixing Device.
Communication State 0= SOTDMA Communication State follows;
1
Selector Flag 1= ITDMA Communication State follows.
Communication State 19 SOTDMA
AP3-9
AP3.1 Messages
Message 10: UTC and Date Inquiry

This message is used when a station is requesting UTC and data from another station.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number of station which inquires UTC
Spare 2 Not used.
Destination ID 30 MMSI number of station which is inquired
Spare 2 Not used.
Message 12: Addressed Safety Related Message

The Addressed Safety Related Message could be variable in length, based on the
amount of safety related text. The length varies between 1 and 5 slots.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
MMSI number of station which is the source of the
Source ID 30
message
Sequence Number 2 0-3
MMSI number of station which is the destination of
Destination ID 30
the message
Retransmit Flag 1 Set upon retransmission.
Spare 1 Not used.
Safety related text Max.936 6-bit ASCII
Max.
Total number of bits Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length of text
1008
AP3-10
AP3.1 Messages
Message 14: Safety Related Broadcast Message

The Safety Related Broadcast Message could be variable in length, base on the amount
of safety related text. The length varies between 1 and 5 slots.
Number of
bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number of source station of message
Spare 2 Not used.
Safety related Text Max.968 6-bit ASCII
Total Number of bits Max. 1008
AP3-11
AP3.1 Messages
Message 15: Interrogation

The Interrogation Message is used for interrogations via the VHF TDMA link other than
UTC and data requests. The response is transmitted on the channel that the interrogation
was received on.
A Class A Shipborne Mobile Station can be interrogated for message identifiers 3 and 5,
by another station. A Class B Shipborne Mobile Station can be interrogated for message
identifiers 18 and 19, by another station. An airborne mobile station can be interrogated
for message identifier 9 by another station. A mobile station mounted on an
Aids-to-Navigation can be interrogated for message identifier 21 by another station. A
base station can be interrogated for message identifiers 4, 17, 20 and 22.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number of interrogating station
Spare 2 Not used.
Destination ID 1 30 MMSI number of first interrogated station
First Requested message type from first interrogated
Message ID 1.1 6
station
Response slot offset for first requested message from
Slot offset 1.1 12
first interrogated station
Spare 2 Not used.
Second Requested message type from first
Message ID 1.2 6
interrogated station
Response slot offset for second requested message
Slot offset 1.2 12
from first interrogated station
Spare 2 Not used.
Destination ID 2 30 MMSI number of second interrogated station
Requested message type from second interrogated
Message ID 2.1 6
station
Response slot offset for requested message from
Slot offset 2.1 12
second interrogated station
Spare 2 Not used.
AP3-12
AP3.1 Messages
Message 16: Assigned Mode Command

Assignment is transmitted by a base station when operating as a controlling entry.
When a Class A shipborne mobile AIS station receives an assignment, it reverts to either
the assigned reporting rate or the resulting reporting rate (when slot assignment is used)
or the autonomously derived reporting rate , whichever is higher.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI of assigning station.
Spare 2 Spare.
Destination ID A 30 MMSI number. Destination identifier A.
Offset A 12 Offset from current slot to first assigned slot.
Increment A 10 Increment to next assigned slot.
MMSI number. Destination identifier B. It is omitted if
Destination ID B 30
there is assignment to station A, only.
Offset from current slot to first assigned slot. It is
Offset B 12
omitted, if there is assignment to station A, only.
Increment to next assigned slot. It is omitted, if there
Increment B 10
is assignment to station A, only.
Spare Max.4 Spare.
Total 96 or 144
Message 17: GNSS Broadcast Binary Message

This message is transmitted by a base station, which is connected to a DGNSS reference
source, and configured to provide DGNSS data to receiving stations.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI of the base station.
Spare 2 Spare.
Surveyed Longitude of DFNSS reference station in
Longitude 18
1/10 min.
Surveyed Latitude of DGNSS reference station in
Latitude 17
1-10 min.
Spare 5 Not used.
Data 0-736 Differential Correction data.
AP3-13
AP3.1 Messages
Message 18: Standard Class B Equipment Position Report

The standard Class B Equipment Position report is output periodically and
autonomously instead of Messages 1, 2, or 3 by Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment,
only.
Message 19: Extended Class B Equipment Position Report

This message is transmitted once every 6 minutes in two slots allocated by the use of
Message 18 in the ITDMA Communication State.
Message 20: Data Link Management Message

This message is used by base station(s) to pre-announce the fixed allocation schedule
(FATDMA) for one or more base station(s) and it is repeated as often as required.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMSI number of base station
Spare 2 Not used.
Offset number 1 12 Reserved offset number
Number of slots 1 4 Number of reserved consecutive slots
Time-out 1 3 Time-out value in minutes
Increment 1 11 Increment to repeat reservation block 1
Offset number 2 12 Reserved offset number (Optional)
Number of slots 2 4 Number of reserved consecutive slots (Optional)
Time-out 2 3 Time-out value in minutes (Optional)
Increment 2 11 Increment to repeat reservation block 2 (Optional)
Spare Max 6 Not used.
AP3-14
AP3.1 Messages
Message 21: Aids to Navigation Report

This station may be mounted on an Aid-to Navigation or this message may be
transmitted by a fixed station when the functionality of an A- to N station is integrated
into the fixed station. This message is transmitted autonomously at a Reporting Rate of
once every three minutes or it may be assigned by an Assigned Mode Command
(Message 16) via the VHF data link, or by an external command.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Source ID 30 MMIS number
Type of
5 Fixing or floating type
Aid-to-Navigation
Name of
120 Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII
Aid-to-Navigation
Longitude in 1/10000 min of position of
Longitude 28
Aid-to-Navigation
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10000 min of Aid-to-Navigation
Reference point for reported position; also indicates
Dimension/Reference
30 the dimension of Aid-to-Navigation in meters, if
for position
relevant.
Type of Electronic
4 GPS, GLONASS, Loran-C etc
position Fixing Device
Time Stamp 6 EPFS mode, or 61 if positioning system is in manual
input mode.
Off-Position Indicator 1 For floating Aid-to-Navigation
Reserved for regional Reserved for definition by a competent regional or
8
or local application local authority.
RAIM-Flag 1 RAIM flag of Electronic Position Fixing Device
0= default = real A to N at indicated position; 1=
Virtual A to N Flag 1 virtual A to N, does not physically exist, may only be
transmitted from AIS station nearby.
0= Station operating in autonomous and continuous
Assigned Mode Flag 1 mode=default
1= Station operating in assigned mode
Spare 1 Spare
This parameter of up to 14 additional 6-bit-ASCII
characters for a 2-slot message may be combined
with the parameter
Name of “Aid-to-Navigation” at the end of that parameter,
0,6,12,18,
Aid-to-Navigation when more than 20 characters are needed for the
24--84 Ed.1.3
Extension Name of Aid-to-Navigation. This parameter is omitted
when no more than 20 characters for the name of
A-to-N are needed in total. Only the required number
of characters is transmitted.
Spare 0,2,4,6 Ed.1.3
Number of bits 272-360 Ed.1.3
AP3-15
AP3.1 Messages
Message 22: Channel Management

This message is transmitted by a base station (as a broadcast message) to command the
VHF data link parameters for the geographical area designed in this message.
Number
of bits
Repeat Indicator 2
Station ID 30 MMSI number of base station
Spare 2 Not used.
Channel A 12 Channel number
Channel B 12 Channel number
TX/RX Mode 4
Power 1 0= high, 1= low
Longitude of area to which the assignment applies;
Longitude 1 18
upper right corner (north-east); in 1/10 min
Latitude of area to which the assignment applies;
Latitude 1 17
upper right corner (north-east); in 1/10 min
Longitude 2 18
lower left corner (south-west); in 1/10 min
Latitude 2 17
lower left corner (south-west); in 1/10 min
Addressed or
0= Broadcast Geographical Area Message =default,
Broadcast Message 1
1= Addressed message (to individual station(s))
Indicator
Channel A bandwidth 1 Bandwidth
Channel B bandwidth 1 Bandwidth
The transitional Zone Size in nautical miles is
Transitional Zone Size 3
calculated by adding 1 to this parameter value.
Spare 23 Not used.
AP3-16
Appendix 4. IEC-61162 sentence
AP4.1 Sentences used in FA-150

The sentences underlined are new IEC-61162 sentences due to AIS.
ABK Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement

ABM Addressed Binary and safety related Message
ACA AIS Regional Channel Assignment Message
ACK Acknowledgement alarm
AIR AIS Interrogation Request
ALR Set alarm state
BBM Broadcast Binary Message
DTM Datum reference
GBS GNSS Satellite fault detection
GGA Global positioning system fix data
GLL Geographic position, latitude/longitude
GNS GNSS fix data
HDT Heading true
LRI Long Range Interrogation
LRF Long Range Function
LR1 Long Range Reply with destination for function request “A”
LR2 Long Range Reply with destination for function request “B, C, E and F”
LR3 Long Range Reply with destination for function request “I, O, P, U and W”
OSD Own ship data
RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
ROT Rate of turn
SSD Ship Static Data
TXT Text transmission
VBW Dual ground/water speed
VDM VHF Data Link Message
VDO VHF Data Link Own-vessel message
VSD Voyage Static Data
VTG Course over ground and ground speed
AP4-1
AP4.2 IEC-61162 AIS sentences

The sentence underlined is new IEC-61162 sentences due to AIS.
ABK Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement

The ABK-sentence is generated when a transaction, initiated by reception of an ABM,
AIR, or BBM sentence, is completed or terminated.
This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested ABM
broadcast of either ITU-R M. 1371 messages 6 or 12. The ABK process utilizes the
information received in ITU-R M. 1371 messages 7 and 13. Upon reception of either a
VHF Data-link message 7 or 13, or the failure of messages 6 or 12, the AIS unit delivers
the ABK sentence to the external application.
This sentence is also used to report to the external application the AIS unit’s handling of
the AIR (ITU-R M. 1371 message 15) and BBM (ITU-R M. 1371 message 8 and 14)
sentences. The external application initiates an interrogation through the use of the use
of the AIR-sentence, or a broadcast through the use of the BBM sentence. The AIS unit
generates an ABK sentence to report the outcome of the AIR or BBM broadcast process.
$--ABK, xxxxxxxxx, a, x.x, x, x *hh<CR><LF>

a b c de
a: MMSI of the addressed destination AIS unit

b: AIS channel of reception
c: ITU-R M.1371 message ID
d: Message Sequence Number
e: Type of acknowledgement
AP4-2
ABM Addressed Binary and safety related Message

This sentence supports ITU-R M. 1371 messages 6 and 12. It provides and external
application with a means to exchange data using an AIS. The message data is defined by
the application only - not the AIS. After receiving this sentence, the AIS initiates a
radio broadcast on the VHF Data Link (VDL) of either message 6 or 12.
$--ABM, x, x, x, xxxxxxxxx, x, x.x, s--s, x*hh<CR><LF>

abc d e f g h
a: Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

b: Sentence number, 1 to 9
c: Sequential Message identifier, 0 to 3
d: The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message
e: AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
f: ITU-R M.1371 message ID (6 or12)
g: Encapsulated data
h: Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
ACA AIS Regional Channel Assignment Message

An AIS unit can receive regional channel management information four ways:
- ITU-R M. 1371 message 22
- DSC telecommand received on channel 70
- manual operator input, and
- an ACA-sentence.
The AIS unit may store channel management information for future use. Channel
management information is applied based upon the actual location of the AIS unit.
An AIS unit is “using” channel management information when the information is being
used to manage the operation of the VHF receivers and/or transmitter inside the AIS
unit. This sentence is used to both enter and obtain channel management information.
$--ACA, x, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x,

a b c d e f
xxxx, x, xxxx, x, x, x, a, x, hhmmss.ss *hh<CR><LF>
g h i j kl mn o
a: Sequence Number, 0 to 9
b: Region Northeast corner latitude-N/S
c: Region Northeast corner longitude-E/W
d: Region Southwest corner latitude-N/S
e: Region Southwest corner longitude-E/W
f: Transition Zone Size (Value of 1 NM to a value of 8 NM)
g: Channel A
h: Channel A bandwidth
AP4-3
i: Channel B
j: Channel B bandwidth
k: TX/Rx mode control
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
CHA TX/RX TX/RX RX RX RX Not used
CHB TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Not used RX
l: Power level control (12.5 W/2 W)

m: Information source
A: ITU-R M.1371 message 22 (Channel management address message)
B: ITU-R M.1371 message 22 (Channel management broadcast geographical
area message)
C: IEC 61162-1 AIS channel assignment sentence
D: DSC channel 70 telecommand
M: Operator manual input
n: In-use flag
o: Time of “in-use” change
ACK Acknowledgement alarm

This sentence is used to acknowledge an alarm condition reported by device.
$--ACK, xxx *hh<CR><LF>

a
a: Local alarm number (identifier)
AP4-4
AIR AIS Interrogation Request

This sentence supports ITU-R M. 1371 message 15. It provides an external application
with the means to initiate a request for specific ITU-R M. 1731 messages from distant
mobile or base AIS stations.
$--AIR, xxxxxxxxx, x.x, x, x.x, x, xxxxxxxxx, x.x, x *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f g h
a: MMSI of interrogated station-1

b: ITU-R M.1371 message requested from station-1 note)
c: Massage sub-section (Reserved for future use)
d: Number of second message from station-1 note)
e: Massage sub-section (Reserved for future use)
f: MMIS interrogated station-2
g: Number of message requested from station-2note)
h: Massage sub-section (Reserved for future use)
Note) Example of messages that may be requested from a distant mobile AIS station
include:
Message3: Position report
Message5: Ship static and voyage related data
Mesage9: Standard SAR aircraft position report
Message18: Standard class B equipment position report
Message19: Extended class B equipment position report
Message21: Aids-to-Navigation report
Example of messages that may be requested from a distant AIS base station
include:
Message4: Base station report
Message17: GNSS broadcast binary message
Message20: Data link management message
Message22: Channel management
AP4-5
ALR Set alarm state

This sentence is used to report an alarm condition on a device and its current state of
acknowledgement.
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss, xxx, A, A, c--c *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e
a: Time of alarm condition change, UTC

b: Local alarm number (identifier) [identification number of alarm source]
c: Alarm condition (A= threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
d: Alarm’s acknowledge state (A=acknowledged, V=unacknowledged)
e: Alarm’s description text
BBM Broadcast Binary Message

This sentence supports generation of an ITU-R M. 1371 Binary Broadcast Message
(message 8) or Safety Related Broadcast Message (message 14). After receiving this
sentence, the AIS initiates a VHF broadcast of either message 8 or 14 within four
seconds.
The success or failure if the broadcast confirmed through the use of the “Addressed and
binary Broadcast Acknowledgement (ABK)“ sentence formatter, and the processes that
support the generation of an ABK-sentence. The AIS is limited in the amount of
encapsulated data that can be sent in each slot and frame. If the length of the message
would exceed five slots, or the AIS broadcast would exceed the limit of 20 RATDMA
slot transmissions for the current frame, the AIS will return an ABK-sentence with an
acknowledgement of “2” – message could not be broadcast.
$--BBM, x, x, x, x, x.x, s--s, x *hh<CR><LF>

ab cd e f g

c: Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
d: AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
e: ITU-R M.1371 message ID, 8 or 14
f: Encapsulated data
Binary data parameter for Message 8 or safety related text parameter for Message 14.
g: Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
AP4-6
DTM Datum reference

Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum. This sentence is used
to define the datum to which a position location, and geographic locations in subsequent
sentences, are referenced. Latitude, longitude and altitude offsets from the reference
datum, and the selection of the reference datum, are also provided.
$--DTM, ccc, a, x.x, a, x.x, a, x.x, ccc *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f
a: Local datum
WGS84=W84
WGS72=W72
SGS85=S85,
PE90=P90
User define=999
IHO datum code
b: Local datum subdivision code
c: Lat offset, min, N/S
d: Lon offset, min, E/W
e: Altitude offset, m
f: Reference datum
WGS84=W84
WGS72=W72
SGS85=S85
PE90=P90
GBS GNSS Satellite fault detection

This message is used to support receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM).
$--GBS, hhmmss.ss, x.x, x.x, x.x, xx, x.x, x.x, x.x *hh<CR><LF>
a b c d e f g h
a: UTC time of the GGA or GNS fix associated with this sentence
b: Expected error in latitude
c: Expected error in longitude
b: Expected error in altitude
e: ID number of most likely failed satellite
f: Probability of missed detection for most likely failed satellite
g: Estimate of bias on most likely failed satellite
h: Standard deviation of bias estimate
AP4-7
GGA Global positioning system fix data

Time, position and fix-related data for a GPS receiver.
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, , x,

a b c d
xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx *hh<CR><LF>
e f g h i j k l
a: UTC of position
b: Latitude, N/S
c: Longitude, E/W
d: GPS quality indicator
0=Fix not available or invalid,
1=GPS SPS mode, fix valid,
2=Differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid,
3=GPS PPS mode ,fix valid,
4=Real Time kinematic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers
5=Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating integers,
6=Dead reckoning mode,
7=Manual input mode,
8=Simulator mode
e: Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different from the
number in view
f: Horizontal dilution of precision
g: Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level (geoid)
h: Units of antenna altitude, m
i: Geoidal separation (difference between the WGC-84)
j: Units of geoidal separation, m
k: Age of differential GPS data
l: Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
AP4-8
GLL Geographic position, latitude/longitude

Latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position fix and status.
$--GLL, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss, A, a *hh<CR><LF>

a b c de
a: Latitude, N/S
b: Longitude, E/W
c: UTC of position
d: Status
A=data valid, V=data invalid
e: Mode indicator
A=Autonomous, M=Manual input, E=Dead reckoning
D=differential, S=Simulator, N=Data not valid
GNS GNSS fix data

Fix data for single or combined satellite navigation systems (GNSS).
$--GNS, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, , c--c,

a b c d
xx, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x *hh<CR><LF>
e f g h i j
a: UTC of position
b: Latitude, N/S
c: Longitude, E/W
d: Mode indicator 1st char.=GPS, 2nd=GLONASS, 3rd=other satellite system
N=No fix F=Float RTK
A=Autonomous E=Dead reckoning mode
D=Differential M=Manual input mode
P=Precise S=Simulator mode
R=Real time Kinematic
e: Total number of satellites in use, 00-99
f: HDOP
g: Antenna altitude, m, re: mean-sea-level(geoid)
h: Geoidal separation, m
i: Age of differential data
j: Differential reference station ID
AP4-9
HDT Heading true

Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true
heading.
$--HDT, x.x, T *hh<CR><LF>

a
a: Heading, degree true
LRI Long Range Interrogation

The long-range interrogation of the AIS is accomplished through the use of two
sentences. The pair of interrogation sentences, a LRI-sentence followed by a
LRF-sentence, provides the information needed by an AIS to determine if it must
construct and provide the reply sentences (LRF, LR1, LR2, and LR3).
$--LRI, x, a, xxxxxxxxx, xxxxxxxxx, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a,

ab c d e f
llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a *hh<CR><LF>
g h
a: Sequence number, 0 to 9
b: Control flag
c: MMSI of requester
d: MMSI of destination
e: Latitude-N/S (north-east co-ordinate)note)
f: Longitude-E/W (north-east co-ordinate) note)
g: Latitude-N/S (south-west co-ordinate) note)
h: Longitude-E/W (south-west co-ordinate) note)
Note) The geographic region being interrogated is a rectangular area defined by

the L/L of the north east and south west corners.
AP4-10
LRF Long Range Function

This sentence is used in both long-range interrogation requests and long-range
interrogation replies. The LRF-sentence is the second sentence of the long-range
interrogation request pair, LRI and LRF.
The LRF-sentence is also the first sentence of the long-range interrogation reply.
The minimum reply consists of a LRF-sentence followed by a LR1-sentence.
The LR2-sentence and/or the LR3-sentence follow the LR1-sentence, if information
provided in these sentences.
$--LRF, x, xxxxxxxxx, c--c, c--c, c--c *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e
b: MMIS of requester
c: Name of requester, 1 to 20 character string
d: Function request, 1 to 26 characters
A=Ship’s: name, callsign, and IMO number
B=Date and time of message composition
C=Position
E=COG (Course over ground)
F=SOG (Speed over ground)
I=ETA (Destination and Estimated Time of Arrival)
O=Draught
P=Ship/Cargo
U=Ship’s: length, breadth, type
W=Persons on board
e: Function reply status
AP4-11
LR1 Long Range Reply with destination for function request “A”
The LR1-sentence identifies the destination for the reply and contains the information
requested by the “A” function identification character (See the LRF-sentence).
$--LR1, x, xxxxxxxxx, xxxxxxxxx, c--c, c--c, xxxxxxxx *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f
b: MMIS of responder
c: MMIS of requester (reply destination)
d: Ship’s name, 1 to 20 characters
e: Call Sign, 1 to 7 characters
f: IMO number, 9 digit number
LR2 Long Range Reply for function requests “B, C, E and F”

The LR2-sentence contains the information requested by the “B, C, E and F” function
identification characters (See the LRF-sentence).
$--LR2, x, xxxxxxxxx, xxxxxxxxx, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a,

a b c d e
yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, N *hh<CR><LF>
f g h
c: Date: ddmmyyyy, 8 digits
d: UTC time of position
e: Latitude, N/S (position co-ordinate, to 1 min.)
f: Longitude, E/W (position co-ordinate, to 1 min.)
g: Course over ground true, value to nearest degree
h: Speed over ground, value to 0.1 knot
AP4-12
LR3 Long Range Reply for function requests “I, O, P, U and W”

The LR3-sentence contains the information requested by the “I, O, P, U and W”
function identification characters (See the LRF-sentence).
$--LR3, x, xxxxxxxxx, c--c, xxxxxx, hhmmss.ss, x.x, cc,

a b c d e f g
x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x *hh<CR><LF>
h i j k
c: Voyage destination, 1 to 20 characters
d: ETA Date: ddmmyy
e: ETA Time, value to nearest second
f: Draught, value to 0.1 meter
g: Ship/Cargo
h: Ship length, value to nearest meter
i: Ships breadth, value to nearest meter
j: Ship type
k: Persons, 0 to 8191
OSD Own ship data

Heading, course, speed, set and drift summary.
$--OSD, x.x, A, x.x, a, x.x, a, x.x, x.x, a *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f g h i
a: Heading, degrees true

b: Heading status A=data valid, V=data invalid
c: Vessel course, degrees true
d: Course reference, B/M/W/R/P
B=bottom tracking log M=manually entered
W=water referenced R=radar tracking (of fixed target)
P=positioning system ground reference
e: Vessel speed
f: Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P
g: Vessel set, degrees true
h: Vessel drift (speed)
i: Speed unit (km/h, Knots, miles/h)
AP4-13
RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

Time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x,

a b c d e
x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a, a *hh<CR><LF>
f g h i
a: UTC of position fix

b: Status (A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning)
c: Latitude, N/S
d: Longitude, E/W
e: Speed over ground, knots
f: Course over ground, degrees true
g: Date: dd/mm/yy
h: Magnetic variation, degrees, E/W
i: Mode indicator
A=Autonomous mode M=Manual input mode
D=Differential mode S=Simulator mode
E=dead reckoning mode N=Data not valid
ROT Rate of turn

Rate of turn and direction of turn.
$--ROT, x.x, A *hh<CR><LF>

a b
a: Rate of turn, deg./min, “-“=bow turns to port

b: Status (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
AP4-14
SSD Ship Static Data

This sentence is used to enter static parameters into a shipboard AIS.
$--SSD, c--c, c--c, xxx, xxx, xx, xx, c, aa *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f g h
a: Ship’s Call Sign, 1 to 7 characters

b: Ship’s name, 1 to 20 characters
c: Pos. ref., “A”, distance from bow, 0 to 511 meters
d: Pos. ref., “B”, distance from stern, 0 to 511 meters
e: Pos. ref., “C”, distance from port beam, 0 to 63 meters
f: Pos. ref., “D”, distance from starboard beam, 0 to 63 meters
g: DTE indicator flag
0=Keyboard and display are a standard configuration,
and communication is supported.
1=Keyboard and display are either unknown or unable to support communication.
h: Source identifier
TXT Text transmission

For the transmission of short text messages. Longer text messages may be transmitted
by using multiple sentences.
$--TXT, xx, xx, xx, c--c *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d
a: Total number of messages, 01 to 99

b: Message number, 01 to 99
c: Text identifier
d: Text message
AP4-15
VBW Dual ground/water speed

Water-referenced and ground-referenced speed data.
$--VBW, x.x, x.x, A, x.x, x.x, A, x.x, A, x.x, A *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e f g h i j
a: Longitudinal water speed, knots

b: Transverse water speed, knots
c: Status: water speed (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
d: Longitudinal ground speed, knots
e: Transverse ground speed, knots
f: Status: ground speed (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
g: Stern transverse water speed, knots
h: Status: stern water speed (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
i: Stern transverse ground speed, knots
j: Status: stern ground speed (A=data valid, V=data invalid)
VDM VHF Data Link Message

This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of a received AIS message packet, as
defined in ITU-R M. 1371 and as received on the VHF Data Link (VDL), using the
“6-bit” field type. The structure provides for the transfer of long binary messages by
using multiple sentences.
$--VDM, x, x, x, a, s—s, x *hh<CR><LF>

ab cd e f

d: AIS Channel, “A” or “B”
e: Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
f: Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
AP4-16
VDO VHF Data Link Own-vessel message

This sentence is used to provide the information assembled for broadcast by the AIS.
It uses the six-bit field type for encapsulation. The sentence uses the same structure as
the VDM sentence formatter.
$--VDO, x, x, x, a, s—s, x *hh<CR><LF>

ab cd e f

d: AIS Channel, “A” or “B”
e: Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
f: Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
VSD Voyage Static Data

This sentence is used to enter information about a ship’s voyage. This information
remains relatively static during the voyage.
$--VSD, x.x, x.x, x.x, c--c, hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, x.x, x.x *hh<CR><LF>
a b c d e f g h i
a: Type of ship and cargo category, 0 to 255

b: Maximum present static draught, 0 to 25.5 meter
c: Persons on-board, 0 to 8191
d: Destination, 1-20 characters
e: Est. UTC of destination arrival
f: Est. day of arrival at destination, 00 to 31 (UTC)
g: Est. month of arrival at destination, 00 to 12 (UTC)
h: Navigational status, 0 to 15
ex) 0=under way using engine
1=at anchor
2=not under command, etc.
i: Regional application flags, 0 to 15
AP4-17
VTG Course over ground and ground speed

The actual course and speed relative to the ground.
$--VTG, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, x.x, K, a *hh<CR><LF>

a b c d e
a: Curse over ground, degrees true

b: Curse over ground, degrees magnetic
c: Speed over ground, knot
d: Speed over ground, km/m
e: Mode indicator
A=Autonomous mode M=Manual input mode
D=Differential mode S=Simulator mode
E=Dead reckoning mode N=Data not valid
AP4-18
AP4.3 New serial sentences overview

The serial digital interface of the AIS is supported by a combination of existing and
new IEC 61162 sentences. The table below summarizes the AIS messages use which
use new sentences.
Table AP4.3.1(a)
Serial output sentence related to received VHF data link (VDL) messages
AIS message Contents Sentence
MSG.1 Position Report
MSG.9 Standard SAR Aircraft Position Report
AIS target display
MSG.18 Standard Class B Equipment Position Report
information
MSG.21 Aids to Navigation Report
MSG.4 Base Station Report
MSG.5 Static and Voyage Related Data
MSG.19 Extended Class B Equipment Position Report
MSG.12 Addressed Safety Related Message
Safety message handling
MSG.14 Safety Related broadcast Message
VDM
MSG.6 Binary Addressed Message External Application
MSG.8 Binary broadcast Message handling
MSG.7 Binary Acknowledgement
MSG.10 UTC/Date inquiry
MSG.11 UTC/Date Response
MSG.13 Safety Relate Acknowledgement
MSG.15 Interrogation System control
MSG.16 Assignment Mode Command
MSG.17 DGNSS Broadcast Binary Message
MSG.20 Data Link Management Message
MSG.22 Channel Management
Serial output sentence related to broadcast VHF data link messages
MSG.5 Static and Voyage Related Data
MSG.6 Binary Addressed Message
MSG.7 Binary Acknowledgement
VHF Data Link messages
MSG.8 Binary broadcast Message VDO
broadcast by AIS
MSG.10 UTC/Date inquiry
MSG.11 UTC/Date Response
MSG.12 Addressed Safety Related Message
MSG.13 Safety Relate Acknowledgement
MSG.14 Safety Related broadcast Message
MSG.15 Interrogation
Addressed binary
- ABK
Acknowledgement
AP4-19
Table AP4.3.3.1(b)
Serial output sentence not directly related to VHF data link messages

- Long Range interrogation LRI
- Long Range interrogation LRF
- Long Range response LR1
Regional channel
- ACA
management information
- Alarm status (existing) ALR
- Alarm status (existing) TXT
Serial input sentence directly related to VHF data link messages

MSG.5 Ship and voyage related data Static and Voyage Related Data SSD
MSG.5 Ship and voyage related data Static and Voyage Related Data VSD
MSG.6 addressed binary Binary Addressed Message ABM
MSG.8 broadcast binary Binary broadcast Message BBM
MSG.12 Addressed safety related Addressed Safety Related Message ABM
MSG.14 broadcast safety related Safety Related broadcast Message BBM
MSG.15 AIS interrogation request Interrogation AIR
Serial input sentence not directly related to VHF data link messages
- channel assignment ACA
- AIS alarm ack (existing) ACK
- Long Range interrogation LRI
- Long Range interrogation LRF
AP4-20
AP4.4 6-bit binary field type code conversion table

The construction of VDO and VDM sentences is shown as follows;
$--VDM (VDO), x, x, x, a, s—s, x *hh<CR><LF>
The “s-s” portion is stipulated as “encapsulated ITU-R M. 1371 radio message.”
For example, in the case of MSG. 1, the sentence is composed with a total of 168 bits
that cover message ID: 6 bits to communication status: 16 bits.
The “s-s” portion is obtained by dividing 168 bits by every 6 bits from the head and
converted into codes. For the PC display, this code is further converted into ASCII code.
The construction of ABM and BBM sentences is shown as follows;

$--ABM, x, x, x, xxxxxxxxx, x, x.x, s--s, x*hh<CR><LF>
$--BBM, x, x, x, x, x.x, s--s, x *hh<CR><LF>
The “s--s” portion is stipulated as “encapsulated ITU-R M. 1371 radio message.”
For example, in the case of MSG. 6, up to 936 bits only of binary data is divided by
every 6 bits from the head and converted into codes. For the PC display, this code is
further converted into ASCII code.
Table AP4.4.1 Six-bit binary field type code conversion table
Valid Binary Field Valid Binary Field Valid Binary Field

Character Represented Character Represented Character Represented
0 (30) 000000 F (46) 010110 d (64) 101100
1 (31) 000001 G (47) 010111 e (65) 101101
2 (32) 000010 H (48) 011000 f (66) 101110
3 (33) 000011 I (49) 011001 g (67) 101111
4 (34) 000100 J (4A) 011010 h (68) 110000
5 (35) 000101 K (4B) 011011 i (69) 110001
6 (36) 000110 L (4C) 011100 j (6A) 110010
7 (37) 000111 M (4D) 011101 k (6B) 110011
8 (38) 001000 N (4E) 011110 l (6C) 110100
9 (39) 001001 O (4F) 011111 m (6D) 110101
: (3A) 001010 P (50) 100000 n (6E) 110110
; (3B) 001011 Q (51) 100001 o (6F) 110111
< (3C) 001100 R (52) 100010 p (70) 111000
= (3D) 001101 S (53) 100011 q (71) 111001
> (3E) 001110 T (54) 100100 r (72) 111010
? (3F) 001111 U (55) 100101 s (73) 111011
@ (40) 010000 V (56) 100110 t (74) 111100
A (41) 010001 W (57) 100111 u (75) 111101
B (42) 010010 ‘ (60) 101000 v (76) 111110
C (43) 010011 a (61) 101001 w (77) 111111
D (44) 010100 b (62) 101010
E (45) 010101 c (63) 101011
Note:
The code in parentheses of Valid Character column is the code obtained by converting Valid
Character into 7-bit ASCII.
AP4-21
7-bit ASCII code table

ASCII is a 7-bit code, representing 128 different characters expressed by
0000000-1111111 (binary), which are converted into character codes 0x00 - 0x7F
(hexadecimal numeral) using the following table.
Table AP4.4.2 Seven-bit ASCII code table
b7, b6, b5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAC % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v

b4
b3 7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
b2
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
b1
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF/NL SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L ¥ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
AP4-22
AP4.5 PFEC I/O Table when Hi Level (NAVNET 2) is set

1. Conditions to select targets
$PFEC,AItsc ,a ,a ,x ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x *hh<CR><LF>
2. Range and bearing of target as well as CPA and TCPA information

$PFEC,AIttm ,x ,xxxx ,xxxxxxxxx ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x ,a ,A ,A ,A *hh<CR><LF>
3. Notifying the target to be changed

$PFEC,AIcht ,a ,xxxxxxxxx ,xxxxxxxxx *hh<CR><LF>
4. Alarm setting-1
$PFEC,AIal1 ,a ,a ,x.x ,x.x *hh<CR><LF>
5. Alarm setting-2
$PFEC,AIal2 ,a ,a ,x.x *hh<CR><LF>
6. Alarm setting-3
$PFEC,AIal3 ,a ,a ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x ,x.x *hh<CR><LF>
7. Kind of alarms generated

$PFEC,AIalt ,A ,A ,A ,A ,A ,A *hh<CR><LF>
8. Setting the handling method to the text message

$PFEC,AIsmm ,a ,a *hh<CR><LF>
9. Request for received message

$PFEC,AIrqm ,a ,a ,xxxx *hh<CR><LF>
10. Transmission of received message log

$PFEC,AIrml ,x ,x ,xxxx ,hhmmss ,xx ,xx ,xxxx ,aa ,a *hh<CR><LF>
11. Test results

$PFEC,AItrs ,ccccccc-cc.cc ,a ,a ,a *hh<CR><LF>
12. Stop of VDO sentence

$PFEC,AIvdc ,a ,a *hh<CR><LF>
13. Notification of message reception

$PFEC,AIrxm ,a ,xxxx ,aa *hh<CR><LF>
14. Alarm response

$PFEC,AIack ,a ,a ,a *hh<CR><LF>
15. VDM stop command to control unit

$PFEC,AIidm ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a ,a *hh<CR><LF>
AP4-23
16. Lost-approved target

$PFEC,AIlst ,a ,xxxxxxxxx *hh<CR><LF>
17. Functions related to port attributes

$PFEC,idatr ,A ,x *hh<CR><LF>
18. Command for function recognition and communication trouble detection

$PFEC,idfnc ,a ,x.x *hh<CR><LF>
AP4-24
Appendix 5. FAISPC MARK2
AP5.1 Connection to PC port
The installation procedure of the FAISPC MARK2 program is described on the

FAISPC MARK2 operation manual.

AP5.1.1 Connection to PC
Connect PC to the FA-150 as follows. Use a 9-pin D-SUB straight cable between the
FA-150 PC port and PC. DTR, CTS, and other control signals are NOT used. The
required signals are RXD, TXD, and GND.
Note:
Control signals are connected between #4:DTR and #6:DSR, #7:RTS and #8:CTS in
the MAIN board.
9 Pin FA-1501 [PC] FA-1502

PC
D-sub port
1 DCD N.C
2 RXD PC SD
3 TXD PC RD
4 DTR DTR
5 GND 0V
6 DSR DSR
7 RTS RTS
FA-1501
8 CTS CTS
9 RI N.C
Frame Shield Shield
[DISP] port
[COM] port
[PC] port
9 pin D-Sub: Straight Cable
Fig. AP5.1.1 Connection to PC
AP5-1
AP5.1.2 Setting
1. Setting of PC port of FA-1501
1. Choose [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET I/O PORT -> SET PC PORT.
2. Set MODE of SET PC PORT to “MONITOR” and SPEED to “38.4 KBPS.”
[SET PC PORT]
MODE : MONITOR
SPEED : 38.4KBPS
2. Setting of FAISPC MARK2

1. Open Option(P) of menu bar and choose Setting COM port.
2. The Setting COM port screen appears. Designate COM PORT and SPEED of PC
connected and designate USE PORT, too.
- COM PORT: Designate COM port of PC.
Reference:
COM PORT of PC can be confirmed by
Control panel -> System -> Hardware ->
Device manager -> Port.
- SPEED : Set to 38400
- USE PORT : Choose SIO
3. Upon completion of setting, click OK and close the Setting COM port screen.
AP5-2
4. By the step-3 setting, communication between FA-150 and PC (FAISPC MARK2)

begins. When communication begins, “OffLine” displayed at the upper left of the
FAISPC MARK2 screen changes to “OnLine.”
OffLine OnLine
Reference:
The setting of I/O port of “Hardware settings” of Initial Settings(I) menu of the menu
bar are the setting in the FA-150. It is same as setting of SET I/O PORT at FA-1502.
In order to standardize the setting, for PC Port setting, set SPEED to 38400 and
MODE to MONITOR.
In the event that setting of Option(P) -> Setting COM port -> SPEED of FAISPC
MARK2 coincides with [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET I/O PORT -> SET
PC PORT -> SPEED of FA-150, communication begins between FA-150 and
PC(FAISPC MARK2).
The setting of [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET I/O PORT -> SET PC PORT ->
MODE may not necessarily coincide with the setting of Initial Settings(I) -> Hardware
-> PC port -> MODE of FAISPC MARK2.
** If the communication speed of PC is adjusted to that of FA-150, FA-150
automatically recognizes MODE as MONITOR through PFEC command from PC
(FAISPC MARK2).**
AP5-3
AP5.2 Connection to LAN Port

AP5.2.1 Connection to PC
Mount the NET-100 board to the MAIN board as illustrated below.
- LAN kit: OP24-8
- Code No. 005-956-020
Name Code No. Q’ty Remarks

1 NET-100 board 008-535-840 1 03P9332
2 Spacer 000-801-678 4
MAIN board
Add NET-100 board
Fig. 5.2.1 Arrangement of NET-100
FA-1501
FA-1502
[DISP] port
[LAN] port
[LAN] port
LAN Cross Cable
Fig. 5.2.2 Connection to PC
AP5-4
AP5.2.2 Setting of FA-150

1. Setting and confirmation of LAN port
1. Choose [MENU] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> SET I/O PORT -> SET LAN PORT.
2. Set MODE to MONITOR. Settings of IP ADDRESS, SUB NET MASK, and PORT
NO. may be kept to the factory defaults. If FA-150 is connected to the in-ship’s LAN
system, change these settings as required.
[SET LAN PORT]

MODE : MONITOR
IP ADDRESS
172.031.024.001
SUB NET MASK
255.255.000.000
PORT NO. : 10000
2. Setting of FAISPC MARK2

1. Open Option(P) of the menu bar and choose Setting COM port.
2. The Setting COM port screen is displayed. Set the USE PORT setting to LAN.
3. Upon completion of setting, click OK and close the Setting COM port screen.
AP5-5
3. Setting of IP of FAISPC MARK2

1. Choose Initial Settings(I) -> Hardware settings of the menu bar and click the LAN
button.
2. Set MODE, ADDRESS, SUBJECT, and PORT NO. of Transponder LAN Port.
For each setting, enter the value confirmed by “1. Setting and confirmation of LAN
port.” This setting is carried out to determine where FAISPC MARK2 is connected.
- MODE : MONITOR
- ADDRESS : Set IP ADDRESS confirmed at SET LAN PORT.
(Default: 172.031.024.001)
- SUBNET : Set SUB NET MASK confirmed at SET LAN PORT.
(Default: 255.255.000.000)
- PORT NO. : Set PORT NO. confirmed at SET LAN PORT.
(Default: 10000)
AP5-6
4. LAN setting of PC (Windows XP)

1. Open < Network and Internet Connections > of [Control panel].
Right-click the Network and

Internet Connections icon.
2. Choose “Network and Internet Connections” icon, right-click property. The following
property of [local area connection] screen appears.
AP5-7
3. Click the “General” tab. Make sure Internet protocol (TCP/IP) has a check mark.
Make sure “Internet protocol (TCP/IP)”

is checked.
4. Choose “Internet protocol (TCP/IP)” and click properties. The following Property of
[Internet protocol (TCP/IP) property] screen appears.
AP5-8
5. Check “Use the next IP address,” and set IP address and subnet mask.
The initial value of IP address of FA-150 is “172.031.024.001” and the subnet mask
is “255.255.0.0.” When setting is carried out on the basis of this value, the IP
addresses that can be set include the following:
- IP address
172.031.xxx.xxX (for example, set 172.031.024.002.)
Note; “X” is a numerical value other than 1. “1” is FA-150.
- Subnet mask
255.255.0.0
1. Put a check here
2. Set IP address
and subnet mask
6. Click OK and register the setting.

7. By the above setting, communication between FA-150 and PC(FAISPC MARK2)
begins. When the communication begins, “OffLine” displayed on the upper left of the
FAISPC MARK2 screen changes to “OnLine.”
OffLine OnLine
AP5-9
AP5.3 Set Static Data from FAISPC MARK2

Never disclose the setting password to the user!!
Procedure
1. Choose Own Vessel -> Static Data on the menu bar.
2. The Static Data screen appears. Type password “FURUNO.” Button Change appears
below SHIP STATIC DATA.
F1
3. Clicking button Change causes the Ship Static Data screen to appear.
AP5-10
4. Setting MMSI, etc. and clicking the OK button displays the password entry screen.
5. The password is “652111.” Enter this password and click the OK button.
6. Upon completion of setting, be sure to close FAISPC MARK2 once.
AP5-11
AP5.4 Menu tree of FAISPC MARK2

The factory defaults are shown in Gothic script (in boldface).
Menu bar
(year/month/day; hour:minute:second)
(Same as L/L+SOG+COG)
(To be continued)
AP5-12
(Continued)
(To be continued)
AP5-13
AP5.5 Editing of a Base chart

AP5.5.1 Overview
1. Base chart
The chart of a PC MKD display is produced based on the WGS-84. This chart (base
chart) can edit an island, the coastline, etc. by using "ChartEditer.exe." For example, the
coastline can be edited based on a satellite photograph. e.g. download image chart data
from NASA homepage.
The Base chart data (127 cell chart data files) are the "BaseChart" holder in the
“FAISPC_MARK2_ROOT” holder, and link up with each the cell chart files covers the
worldwide. In addition, cell chart data files covers the range of 20 degrees of N(S)/E(W).
For example, "N20E120.wmp" of a filename shows the position at the South-West
corner of a base chart.
BaseChart holder
Using ChartEditer.exe
Cell chart data file
x127 Correction of chart

Cell chart data file Reference
e.g. NASA image chart data
40N 120E
20 deg. N20E120.wmp
20N 140E
20N 120E 20 deg.
Cell chart data file

Coverage of cell chart data
Base Chart (Cell chart files)
2. Utility software: ChartEditor.exe

The utility software: ChartEditor.exe that edits a base chart is software for Furuno-dealer.
The utility software download in the Furuno Tech.Net.
AP5-14
AP5.5.2 Open the ChartEditor.exe

Click the “ChartEditor.exe.” file to start the ChartEditor.
Select “Open(O)” from File(F) menu of the ChartEditor and a base chart (cell chart data
file) to edit from BaseChart holder.
Open
Select “cell chart data file”
AP5-15
AP5.5.3 Basic operation

1. Operation of a base chart display
Set a pointer on a base chart display, press the right and left button of a mouse and drag.
A function changes with drug directions.
- It returns to the operation chart display of

one time ago. - It returns to the original chart (20-degree angle).
Press the right and left button of a mouse, Press the right and left button of a mouse, and drag to
and drag to the direction of the upper left. the direction of the upper right.
- The present chart is set to one half. - Chart scale up

Press the right and left button of a mouse, Set a pointer on the upper right of the area to
and drag to the direction of the lower left. scale up, press the right and left button of a
mouse, and drag to the direction of the lower
right to the range to scale up.
Centering:
Set a pointer on a position to make it move centering on a display, and click the right
and left button of a mouse.
AP5-16
2. Overview of the button function
- UNDO
Cancel of the performed operation. - Ref. Phot
- +-+-+-+ By a check mark, the image chart
Cancel of the operation function which tries to perform. data of the “jpg” form specified at
- Add and Mod. the base chart can be downloaded.
Editing of the each line and the point that the base chart is An arrow button shows movement
drawn are performed. of the downloaded image chart data.
- Del. Point
Each point that the base chart is drawn is deleted.
Scale
- Add. Polygon, Del. Polygon

Adding, and deleting polygon is carried out.
Add. Polygon; in spite of a chart scale, the
polygon is made about 5 mm angle.
-100m/Pixel, 30m/Pixel,
-10m/Pixel, 1m/Pixel
It rewrites to the display which is
applicable to the length per pixel of PC.
Operation guidance display
Polygon:
For example, polygon is an island.
AP5-17
AP5.5.4 Editing of the base chart

1. Add. Polygon：Polygon is added.
It is used when adding new polygons to a base chart. The size of the polygon to add is
respectively about 5 mm regardless of the scale of a chart. The size of the added
polygon, form and position are correctable later.
Procedure
1. You must scale up the base chart part of the position to add.
Sets a pointer at the upper left of the area to scale up. And then, press the right and
left button of the mouse and drag to the direction of the lower right to the expansion
range. Repeat this operation to the scale to edit.
2. Click the Add. Polygon button.
3. Set a pointer on the position which adds an island, and right or left click to add an
island. This operation can be performed continuously.
4. Left click the +-+-+-+ button when finishing the Add. Polygon operation.
4. Operation finish by clicking the +-+-+-+.

Button.
1. Scale up of a chart
3. Set a pointer to the add position

and a left click.
2.Click the Add. Polygon button.
Add. Polygon Operation guidance message:

Specify the location to place a new Polygon with Left or Right Button Click
AP5-18
2. Del. Polygon：deleting a polygon

This is used when deleting polygons such as land drawn by the closed line or polygons
added by Add.Polygon operation
Procedure
1. You must scale up or scale down the base chart part of the position to delete.
2. Click the Del. Polygon button.
3. When the pointer is set to the polygon to delete and a right or left click is carried out,
the chosen polygon changes to red, and the "?" mark is displayed on the polygon to
delete. Right click when you choose the island to delete accidentally.
4. Left click when deleteing a polygon.
Left click the UNDO button, when you deleted accidentally.
5. When finishing the Del. Polygon operation, left click the +-+-+-+ button.
Deleting of the lands drawn by the

closed line.
Deleting of the lands
added by Add. Polygon
operation.
?
?
Del. Polygon Operation guidance message：

1) Specify Polygon to be deleted with Left or Right Button Click
2) Delete -> Left Button Click, cancel -> Right Button Click
AP5-19
3. Add and Mod. and Del. Point：Editing of the polygon

Change of the position to constitute a polygon, addition and deletion are performed.
Refer to the operation guidance column for basic operation.
1. Add. and Mod. Operation

1) When specifying the polygon for modification;
Click the Add and Mod. button, and set a pointer to the target polygon. And then, the
selected polygon changes to a red by clicking a right or left click.
Polygon;
Changes to Red

Select Polygon to be edited. Left or Right Button Click
Short-cut key: change polygon -> CTRL+L/R

When specifying a polygon;
Set a pointer to the target polygon, right or left click with pressing the Ctrl key.
AP5-20
2) When adding a point to the polygon;

Procedure
1. Specify the target polygon to modify.
2. When the pointer is set to the line to add and left click is carried out, the chosen
line changes to red.
3. Set a pointer on the position of the point to add and a left click.
Left click the UNDO button, when you added accidentally.
When specifying a line and a left click,

the line changes to red.
Case-1) When carrying out a left click on the specified line,

the point is added.
Case-2) When specifying position and a left

click, the point is added.

add point -> Left or Right Button Click
add point -> Left Button Click , move point -> Right Button Click ,
change polygon -> CTRL+L/R
AP5-21
3) When moving the point of a polygon;

Procedure
2. When the pointer is set to the position to move and right click is carried out, the
chosen point changes to red.
3. Set a pointer on the position of the point to move and a left click.
Left click the UNDO button, when you moved accidentally.
When specifying a point and a right click, the point changes to red.
When specifying a voluntary position and a left

click, the point is moved.
Add. Polygon Operation guidance message：

add point -> Left or Right Button Click
add point -> Left Button Click , move point -> Right Button Click ,
change polygon -> CTRL+L/R
4) When combining the point of a polygon and other point of a polygon;

Procedure
2. When the pointer is set to the position to combine and right click is carried out, the
3. Set a pointer near the point of other polygons to combine.
AP5-22
4. When a right click is carried out, a combine the point of polygon and the point of
other polygon. Left click the UNDO button, when you combine accidentally.
When specifying a point and a right click, the point

change to red.
Align the point to combine on the

near point and a right click.
Del. Polygon Operation guidance message:

delete point -> Left or Righ Button Click. change Polygon -> CTRL+L/R
delete point -> Left Button Click, cancel -> Right Button Click
AP5-23
2. Del. Point operation
To delete a point of the polygon;

Procedure
1. Click the Del. Point. button, set a pointer to the target polygon and a left click. The
2. When the pointer is set to the position to delete and right or left click is carried out,
the chosen point changes to red, and the “?” mark is displayed.
3. Furthermore, left click deletes the point.
Left click the UNDO button, when you deleted accidentally.
When specifying a point and a right or

left click, the point changes to red.
？ Deleting is carried out by a

left click.
Del. Polygon guidance message:

Delete point -> Left or Righ Button Click. change Polygon -> CTRL+L/R
Delete point -> Left Button Click, cancel -> Right Button Click
AP5-24
AP5.5.5 Downloaded “World Wind” from the NASA homepage

In order to use the image chart data of NASA, you have to download
“World_Wind_1.3.3.1_Full.exe” of free software from the NASA homepage.
The required specification of PC is;

- Windows 2000 or XP - Intel Pentium 3.1 GHz or AMD Athlon
- 256 MB of RAM - 3D Graphics Card
- DSL/Cable connection or faster - 2GB of disk space
Procedure of download
1. Open “http://worldwind.arc.nasa.gov/ ”.
2. Click the “World wind 1.3” from the Download column and download this software.
World Wind 1.3 Download(1.3.3.1)
3. When download is completed, the icon of “World wind_1.3.3.1_Full.exe” is made.

The “World Wind 1.3” is installed by this icon.
Note:
Please install this, if installation of "DirectX" software is required during installation
of “World Wind 1.3”.
AP5-25
AP5.5.6 Download the NASA image chart data

Click the “World Wind 3.1” and install the image chart data of the modification part of a
base chart into PC by "jpg" form.
The filename of the image to install is;
“latitude_ longitude_ the direction angle（Heading）_
camera altitude (Altitude)_comment (if required).jpg” form
Example) 135.37984E_34.66991N_0.60115_21989.jpg
In addition, latitude/longitude is the center of an image chart.
Position data etc. are displayed on the upper right of

a display by selecting View -> Show Position.
Zoom-in, Zoom-out
The image chart data of a modification
part is obtained by mouse operation.
Latitude: 34.66991
Longitude: 135.37984
Heading: 0.60115
Altitude: 21989m
Terrain Elevation: 1.00meters
Save the image chart data by selecting Ｆｉｌｅ -> Save

Screeshot. Since the name to a position is put
automatically, add Heading and Altitude.
Note:
A file format is jpg form.
AP5-26
AP5.5.7 Editing a base chart by

using the NASA image chart data.
The download image chart data is installed into a base chart, and you can edit a base
chart.
Procedure
1. Put a check mark into the Ref. Point and select a file to install.
2. Since an image chart data is put on a base chart, an image chart data can be moved
and be overlapped. An arrow button carries out movement of an image. And you must
put on the standard position of the base chart.
3. Modify a base chart along the coastline of an image.
4. After finishing a modification of a base chart, save by selecting File-> Save
operation.
Put a check mark into the Ref. Point, and download

image chart data.
An arrow button: Image chart data movement

●: Image chart position is returned to the original position.
Modify a base chart.
Save the modified base chart.
AP5-27
Ｄ−１
ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ (1)
WARNING LABEL 1
86-003-1011-1
(100-236-231)
+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｺﾈｼﾞﾌﾀｳｴ
UPPERLID +ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｺﾈｼﾞ
WASHER HEAD SCREW
24-006-1012-1 WASHER HEAD SCREW
M4 X8 C2
700W ﾎﾟﾘｼ-ﾙｸﾛﾅｲﾛﾝﾜﾂｼﾔﾂｷ
(100-321-011) M4 X8 C2
700W ﾎﾟﾘｼ-ﾙｸﾛﾅｲﾛﾝﾜﾂｼﾔﾂｷ
(000-861-867)
(000-861-867)
ﾌﾀｼﾀ
LOWERLID
24-006-1013-1
ｾﾂｿﾞｸﾋﾖｳｼﾞﾊﾘﾏｰｸ (100-321-021)
LABEL FOR CONNECTION
SW-PH ｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝ 24-006-1112-2
SW-PH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY (100-321-182)
24-006(ｽｲｯﾁｰ 4P ) ｿｳｻﾚﾊﾞ-
(005-955-770) TERMINAL OPENER
231-131
(000-808-981) +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB
ｽｸｳｴｱﾌﾞﾂｼﾕ
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B *
BUSH
M3 X8 C2700W MBNI2
SB-1 909-F
(000-881-404)
ﾛﾂｷﾝｸﾞﾜｲﾔ -ｻﾄﾞﾙ (000-126-024)
LOCKING WIRE SADDLE
LWSM-030 6 R X /DSC ｶﾊﾞｰ
(000-809-275) ｴﾂｼﾞｻﾄﾞﾙ R X /DSC PCB COVER
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾀﾞｲ EDGE SADDLE 24-006-1022-1
CLAMP PLATE EDS-3 (100-321-101)
24-006-1014-1 (000-108-152-10) +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB
(100-321-031) WASHER HEAD SCREW *B *
M4 X 10 C2700W MBNI2
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｳｴ DSC ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ

UPPER CLAMP ｹｲｺｸﾊﾘﾏ -ｸ DSC PCB
24-006-1016-3 CAUTION STICKER +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB 24P0034
(100-321-053) 14-055-4202-1 WASHER HEAD SCREW *B * (005-955-860) R X 1ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
(100-245-221) M3 X8 C2700W MBNI2 R X 1 PCB
(000-881-404) 24P0033A
ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞｼｰﾄｳｴ PWR ｶﾊﾞｰ (005-955-840)
UPPER BLIND SHEET PWR PCB COVER R X 2ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
24-006-1024-0 24-006-1018-0 R X 2 PCB
(100-321-120) (100-321-070) 24P0033B
(005-955-850)
PWR ｸﾐﾋﾝｹｰﾌﾞﾙ (FPC )

ﾛﾂｶｸｾﾑｽ B ｽﾘﾜﾘ PWR ASSEMBLY FPC CABLE
HE X .WASHER HEAD BOLT FA-1501 SML2CD20 X 50BD 8P0.5S4
M 6X 25 SUS304 (005-955-910) (000-150-209)
(000-802-771)
ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｼﾀｹｰﾌﾞﾙ (FPC )
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB
LOWER CLAMP FPC CABLE
24-006-1015-2 SML2CD50 X 55BD 8P0.5S4
M3 X8 C2700W MBNI2
(100-321-042) +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB (000-150-210)
(000-881-404)
WASHER HEAD SCREW *B * MAIN ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
M3 X 10 C2700W MBNI2 MAIN PCB
ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞｼｰﾄｼﾀ (000-881-405) 24P0035
LOWER BLIND SHEET TX ｶﾊﾞｰ VH ｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝ
(005-955-870) VH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
24-006-1023-0 TX PCB COVER
(100-321-110) 24-006-1021-0 24-007(4ｰ 4P )
(100-321-090) (005-955-780)
TX ｸﾐﾋﾝ
TX ASSEMBLY
FA-1501
+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞB (005-955-900)
M3 X8 C2700W MBNI2
(000-881-404) ﾛﾂｷﾝｸﾞﾜｲﾔ -ｻﾄﾞﾙ
MOT ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄｺﾈｸﾀ(231) CONNECTOR LOCKING WIRE SADDLE
MOT PCB
LWSM-0 605
24P003 6 231-308/206-FUR
P4 (000-809-277)
(005-955-880) (005-956-050)
P6 231-308/206-FUR
ﾛﾂｷﾝｸﾞﾜｲﾔ -ｻﾄﾞﾙ (005-956-060)
LOCKING WIRE SADDLE
LWSM-0 605 231-308/206-FUR
P7
(000-809-277) ｽｸｳｴｱﾌﾞﾂｼﾕ (005-956-070)
CB-VH ｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝ BUSH 231-308/206-FUR
CB-VH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY SB-1 909-F P8
(005-956-080)
24-005(ﾌﾞﾚｰｶｰ 4P ) (000-126-024) 231-310/206-FUR
(005-955-760) P9
+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞBK (005-956-090)
WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK * 231-310/206-FUR
M3 X8 C2
700W MBNI2 P10
(005-956-100)
(000-804-626)
ｹｰｽ 231-313/206-FUR
P11
CASE (005-956-110)
24-006-1011-4
231-305/206-FUR
(100-321-004) P12
+ﾅﾍﾞｺﾈｼﾞ (005-956-030)
GPS TB ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ
PAN HEAD SCREW
GPS TB PCB
M4 X 20 C2700W MBNI2 MODEL FA-150
24P0043
LAN ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞ (000-861-131)
(005-955-920)
LAN BLIND ｺﾈｸﾀ(231)
24-006-1113-0 CONNECTOR
(100-321-190) PW M4
M ｶﾞﾀｺﾈｸﾀｸﾐﾋﾝ SW M4 ｿﾄﾊﾊﾂｷｻﾞｶﾞﾈ
M-TYPE CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY N M4 EX TERNAL TOOTH LOCK WASHER APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT FA-1501 ﾄﾗﾝｽﾎﾟﾝﾀﾞ部
M R
ﾌﾟﾗｸﾞﾊﾘﾏｰｸ 150
80-0670 PW M4 M4 C51
91W MBNI2 PLUG STICKER 150
(005-955-790) +ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽﾈｼﾞBK
PW
SW
M4
M4
(000-864-506) ＣＯＭ３ＥＸＴＤＩ
ＳＰＬＡＹ
24-006-1111-1 10 Aug.2005 10 Aug.2005 10 Aug.2005 TRANSPONDER UNIT

WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK * WING NUT M4
M3 X8 C2
700W MBNI2
(000-804-626)
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S.kubota DWG.NO. C4431-E01-B
ﾌﾞﾝﾊﾟｲｷﾋﾖｳｼﾞﾌﾞ
DIS TRIB UTION B O X FA -1502
D B-1 DIS PLA Y UNIT
(000-054-087) (000-150-215)
ﾌｸｺﾞｳｸｳﾁｭｳｾﾝﾌﾞ
GVA -100-T
GP S /VH F COM B INED ANTENNA
(000-041-941)
MODEL FA -150
APPROVED CHECKED DRAWN UNIT FA -1502/GVA -100/D B-1

表示部他
01 S ep.2005 01 S ep.2005 01 S ep.2005 DIS PLA Y UNIT AND OTHER S
Ｄ−２
H.Kuwamura T.Yoshida S .kubota DWG.NO. C 4431-E02-B

Contents of Drawings
Name Type Dwg. No. Page

Interconnection Diagram ― C4431-C01 S-1
FA-150 Schematic Diagram ― C4431-K01 S-2
FA-150 System Diagram ― C4431-B01 S-3
24P0032-1/3 C4431-K04 S-4
FA-1502: Tx 24P0032-2/3 C4431-K05 S-5
24P0032-3/3 C4431-K06 S-6
24P0033-1/2 C4431-K07 S-7
FA-1502: RX1/RX2
24P0033-2/2 C4431-K08 S-8
FA-1502: DSC 24P0034 C4431-K09 S-9
24P0035-1/5 C4431-K10 S-10
24P0035-2/5 C4431-K11 S-11
FA-1502: MAIN 24P0035-3/5 C4431-K12 S-12
24P0035-4/5 C4431-K13 S-13
24P0035-5/5 C4431-K14 S-14
24P0036-1/3 C4431-K15 S-15
FA-1502: MOT 24P0036-2/3 C4431-K16 S-16
24P0036-3/3 C4431-K17 S-17
FA-1502: PWR 24P0037 C4431-K03 S-18
FA-1502: Interconnection Diagram ― C4431-K02 S-19
24P0062-1/3 C4431-K18 S-20
FA-1502: CPU 24P0062-2/3 C4431-K19 S-21
24P0062-3/3 C4431-K20 S-22
DB-1 C4417-K15 S-23
PR-240CE ― C5003-K02 S-24
AC/DC Power supply
PLE PLE24HSZ C5003-K03 S-25
Pilot Plug Unit: OP24-3 ― C4417-K18 S-26
S-0
Ｓ − １
1 2 3 4 5 6
選択
SELECT MJ-A10SPF0012,5m MJ-A10SPF COM
(10m/25m/50m/100m,OPTION) モモ/アカ PINK/RED 表示部
DISP DISP_TD_A 1 1 TX_A MONITOR UNIT
P モモ/クロ PINK/BLK
複合空中線部 GPSアンテナトランスポンダ部 DISP_TD_B 2
キ/アカ YEL/RED
2 TX_B FA-1502
GPS ANTENNA GND_ISO 3 3 RX_A
GPS/VHF ANTENNA TRANSPONDER UNIT DISP_RD_A 4 キ/クロ YEL/BLK 4 RX_B
GPA-017S P ハイ/アカ GRY/RED
GVA-100 DISP_RD_B 5 5 SW_H
OR FA-1501 GND_ISO 6 ハイ/クロ GRY/BLK 6 SW_L POWER MJ-A3SPF
FUSE
3A
GSC-001 DISP_SW(+) 7 シロ/アカ WHT/RED 7 0V MJ-A3SPF0013
VHFアンテナ DC_IN+ 1 WHT シロ
A 150M-W2VN DISP_SW(-) 8
P シロ/クロ WHT/BLK 8 0V DC_IN- 2 BLK クロ 3.5m, φ6.8 12-24VDC
VHF ANTENNA
OR *2 9 NC FG 3
150M-W2VN TTYCS-4 *1
0.2m(GPA-017S)
FAB-151D COM1_TD_A 1 LONG RANGE 10 FG
0.6m(GSC-001)
OR *2 COM1 P
COM1_TD_B 2 (MAX.100m)
FAB-151D OR EXT DISPLAY
GND_ISO 3 GND *1
(IEC61162-1/2) IV-1.25sq.
GSC-001 COM1_RD_A 4
P
COM1_RD_B 5
M-P-7
GND_ISO 6
TNC-J-3 COM1_JP 7
VHF-ANT *4
COM1_JP 8
RG-10/UY *1 M-P-7
ANT
AC/DC電源ユニット
TNCP-NJ E COM2 COM2_TD_A 1 TTYCS-4 *1
EXT DISPLAY, NAVNET2 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY
P
COM2_TD_B 2 (MAX.100m)
(IEC61162-1/2) PR-240-CE UNIT
0.8m
3 WHT シロ + DC OUT AC IN DPYC-1.5 *1 100-115/200-230VAC

GND_ISO
N-P-8DFB
NJ-TP-3DXV-1 1φ,50/60Hz
1m COM2_RD_A 4 BLK クロ -
8D-FB-CV,30/50m(L>20m) *2 P
GPS-ANT COM2_RD_B 5
N-J-3
RG-10/UY,MAX.20m *1 N-P-8DFB DPYC-1.5 *1

GND_ISO 6 *2 DC IN + 24VDC
COM2_JP 7 -
8 *4 *7
COM2_JP
N-P-8DFB
N-P-8DFB
M-P-3 PE, IV-1.25sq. *1

B *2 1m VHF-ANT COM3_TD_A 1 TTYCS-4 *1
EXT DISPLAY, NAVNET2 保護アース
8D-FB-CV,30/50m(L>20m) 分配器 COM3 P (MAX.100m)
N-J-3 1m DISTRI- COM3_TD_B 2 (IEC61162-1/2)
RG-10/UY,MAX.20m *1
BUTOR GND_ISO 3
DB-1 TNC-P-3 COM3_RD_A 4
1m P
GPS-ANT COM3_RD_B 5 COM4
GND_ISO 6 1 COM1
COM3_JP 7 2 パイロットプラグユニット
∼
8 *4 *7 PILOT PLUG UNIT
COM3_JP
POWER
3 TTYCS-4 *1
EXT DISPLAY COM3 TTYCS-4 *1 OP24-3 *2 206486-1 206485*5
DPYC-2.5 *1 4 (MAX.100m) (MAX.30m)
12-24VDC 1 DC(+) COM4 COM4_TD_A 1 5 接続は上と同じ (IEC61162-2) 1 1 TX A 1 PC
2 DC(-) COM4_TD_B 2 6 Connect cable same as above. 2 2 TX B 4
GND_ISO 3 3 3 RX A 5
AC/DC電源ユニット COM4_2_RD_A 4 TTYCS-1Q *1
SENSOR 4 RX B 6
4
AC/DC POWER SUPPLY COM4_2_RD_B 5 (MAX.100m)
(IEC61162-2) 5 5 SHIELD 9
100-115/200-230VAC PR-240-CE UNIT GND_ISO 6 6
DPYC-1.5 *1 AC IN DC OUT + COM4_JP 7 or
1φ,50/60Hz *4 *7
- COM4_JP 8
TTYCS-1 *1 EXT DISPLAY : RADAR
COM4_1_RD_H 9 SENSOR
DPYC-2.5 *1 + DC IN *2 (MAX.100m) ECDIS
24VDC COM4_1_RD_C 10 (IEC61162-1)
- PILOT PLUG
C COM5_TD_A 1 *7 SENSOR : GPS
COM5
PE, IV-1.25sq. *1 COM5_TD_B 2 GYROCOMPASS
保護アース GND_ISO 3 SPEED LOG
TTYCS-1Q *1
COM5_2_RD_A 4 SENSOR ROT
5 (MAX.100m)
COM5_2_RD_B (IEC61162-2) No.2 表示部 No.2 MONITOR UNIT
GND_ISO 6 DISP
*3 D-SUB 9P PC COM5_JP 7
RS-232C CABLE *4 *7 or DISP_SW(+) 7
PC 1 NC COM5_JP 8 P MJ-A10SPF0012
(MAX.15m) TTYCS-1 *1 DISP_SW(-) 8
2 PC_SD COM5_1_RD_H 9 SENSOR
3 PC_RD 10 (MAX.100m)
COM5_1_RD_C (IEC61162-1) COM2 or COM3 MJ-A10SPF COM
4 DTR モモ/アカ PINK/RED 表示部
*7 TD_A 1 1 TX_A MONITOR UNIT
5 0V COM6 COM6_TD_A 1 P モモ/クロ PINK/BLK
TD_B 2 2 TX_B FA-1502
6 DSR COM6_TD_B 2 キ/アカ YEL/RED
Antenna Unit GND_ISO 3 3 RX_A
7 RTS GND_ISO 3 キ/クロ YEL/BLK
TTYCS-1Q *1 RD_A 4 4 RX_B
DGPSﾋﾞｰｺﾝ受信機 8 CTS COM6_2_RD_A 4 SENSOR P ハイ/アカ GRY/RED
(MAX.100m) RD_B 5 5 SW_H
DGPS BEACON 9 NC COM6_2_RD_B 5 (IEC61162-2) ハイ/クロ GRY/BLK
GND_ISO 6 6 SW_L
RECEIVER GND_ISO 6 7 シロ/アカ WHT/RED
or 7 0V
GR-80 COM6_JP 7 シロ/クロ WHT/BLK
注記 *4 *7 TTYCS-1 *1 8 8 0V
DATA PC COM6_JP 8 9 SENSOR
＊１）造船所手配。 (MAX.100m) 9 NC
1 3 PC_RD COM6_1_RD_H 9 11 (IEC61162-1) *7
D ＊２）オプション。 7 5 0V AD_DATA_H 10
10 FG
＊３）ユーザー手配。 11 *7
COM6_1_RD_C/AD_DATA_C
＊４）IEC61162-2使用時はジャンパーを追加する。 *1 12
LAN *2 AD_CLK_H *6
＊５）AMP社製。 STP CABLE(CAT.5) TTYCS-1Q *1
PC 1 TXP AD_CLK_C 13 AD-100 GYROCOMPASS
＊６）AD-10ﾌｫｰﾏｯﾄ（GYRO-IEC61162がないときに必要） *7 (MAX.10m)
＊７）使用しない芯線はCOM1のように筐体に接地する。 2 TXN
3 RXP EXT ALM ALM_A 1 (NORMAL OPEN)
4 NC ALM_B 2 (NORMAL CLOSE)
NOTE: TTYCS-1Q *1
5 NC ALM_C 3 ALARM SYSTEM
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. 4 (MAX.100m)
6 RXN ACK_H
*2: OPTION. 5
7 NC ACK_C
*3: USER SUPPLY.
8 NC DRAWN TYPE
*4: ADD JUMPER WHEN USING IEC61162-2.
03P9332
*7 Jun. 14, '05 E.MIYOSHI FA-150
*5: PRODUCED BY AMP INC. GND *1 CHECKED 名前
*6: GYRO CONVERTOR AD-100 IS REQUIRED WHEN IEC61162 GYRO SIGNAL IV-2sq. TAKAHASHI.T 国際船舶自動識別装置
APPROVED
IS NOT AVAILABLE. Y. Hatai 相互結線図
*7: CONNECT UNUSED WIRES TO CHASSIS LIKE COM1. IEC61162-1: 4800BPS SCALE MASS NAME
kg U-AIS TRANSPONDER
IEC61162-2: 38.4KBPS
DWG. No.
C4431-C01-H INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
Ｓ−２１
Ｓ−２２
Ｓ−２３
Ｓ−２４
Ｓ−２５
Ｓ−２６

FA150 Service Manual D1 1-15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FA150 Service Manual D1 1-15

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FA150 Service Manual D1 1-15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

U-AIS Transponder

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2006

Connection to NavNet vx2 and 3D

Software: V01.09 (FA-1501) and V01.07 (FA-1502) or above

Fig.1 S2 on MAIN board, 24P0035

SET LAN PORT menu

[SET LAN PORT] 2/2

Fig.4 shows the original menu for PC connection.

[SET LAN PORT]

AIS Test Report

Model: FA-150 FA-100

The AIS has been tested according to IMO SN/Circ.227

AUTO MATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS) TEST REPORT

Name of ship/call sign:

2. AIS programming . Static information

3. AIS programming . Dynamic information

4. AIS programming . voyage related information

5. Performance test using measuring instrument

6. On air. performance test

Electromagnetic interference from AIS observed to other installations?:

This Test Report is in accordance with MSC.1/Circ. 1252

1. AIS Initial Setting List (FA-100)

Setting Item Setting

Setting Item Setting

Setting Item Setting

Program Number Version

Source of energy Main Emergency Reserve

3. Interconnection Diagram (FA-100)

VHF ANT CB-100

GPS ANT Extra-1

Setting Item Setting

SET I/O SENSOR SENSOR

Source of energy Main Emergency Reserve

3. Interconnection Diagram (FA-150)

GPS ANT VHF ANT

4. Antenna Lay out Grid Scale: m

4. Antenna Lay out Grid Scale: m

Setting and Checking Guide

1.2 Configuration ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5

Chapter 2. Parts Location

Chapter 3. System Setting

3.2 Initial Settings･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-2

3.3 I/O Port Settings ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-6

3. COM4 and COM5 port Settings･････････････････････････････ 3-13

3.4 EXT ALM Output Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-22

3.9 PR-240 input voltage modification ････････････････････････････････ 3-29

Chapter 4. Menu Tree

4.2 [NAV STATUS] ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4-2

Chapter 5. Block Description

5.2 FA-1501 Block Description ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-4

5.3 FA-1502 Block Description ･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-20

Chapter 6. Updating Program

6.2 Updating Procedure ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-5

7.2 Measurement and Adjustment ･････････････････････････････････････ 7-3

8.1 ALARM STATUS･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2

8.2 SENSOR STATUS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-7

8.3 INTERNAL GPS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-13

8.4 DIAGNOSTICS ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-14